Yamaha CX-A5100 de handleiding

CX-A5100
Yamaha
Merk
Yamaha
Model
CX-A5100
Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding
English
AV Pre-Amplifier
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CINEMA DSP HD3 for new surround format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PREPARATIONS 20
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting a power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 40
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting a device with analog multichannel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 45
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
PLAYBACK 66
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD
3
) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
En 3
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Playing back music via AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 96
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . .103
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
CONFIGURATIONS 112
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 143
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 145
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
En 4
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
APPENDIX 160
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) (x4)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
YPAO microphone Microphone base
Pole
*Using for angle/height measurement
during YPAO.
Power cable
*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.
CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right way
round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise
specified.
• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio (via power amplifier)
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.177
Supports 2- to 11-channel balance/unbalance
pre-out and up to 2 subwoofer connections.
Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in
various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.45
• Reproducing stereo or latest
multichannel sounds such as Dolby
Atmos with the sound fields like actual
movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP HD
3
)
. p.70
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.74
USB device
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
•Bluetooth
. p.79
• iPod/iPhone
. p.80
•USB
. p.84
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.87
• Internet radio
. p.91
•AirPlay
. p.94
AV receiver (the unit)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
. p.67
Audio
Control
iPod/iPhone/
Bluetooth device
Playback of Dolby Atmos contents
supported
. p.22
4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported
En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.35)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect
video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game
consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.33)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video
output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.57)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router
(access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables
connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router.
❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.72)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
❑ DAC Digital Filter (p.130)
You can select the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to
have favorite sounds.
❑ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode (p.114)
By adjusting the elimination level of jitter in digital audio, you can enhance the DAC
accuracy of the unit.
❑ Operating external devices with the supplied remote control
(p.150)
You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control by registering the
remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players).
❑ Backlight illumination remote control
The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate the remote control even in a dark
home theater room.
❑ Object-based surround formats supported
The unit supports the new surround formats: Dolby Atmos and DTS:X.
(Firmware update is required to enable DTS:X playback. For details on update, visit the
Yamaha website).
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct
En 8
Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for
audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be
used for the corresponding input source (p.111).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output
(p.128).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input
into the unit (p.133). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.109).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese,
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.43).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware
(p.148). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV
when a firmware update is available (p.159).
Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details,
see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.112)
• SCENE settings (p.115)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.118)
• Various function settings (p.121)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.144)
• System settings (p.146)
En 9
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment
of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard
directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the
walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is
affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken
together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field
CINEMA DSP HD
3
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual
sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA
DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide
variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source
such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of
that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you
the sensation of actually being in that scene.)
In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that includes
the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial sense.
“CINEMA DSP HD
3
” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field playback technology that
takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the
sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than
twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA
DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural
and powerful spatial sound field.
Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP
CINEMA DSP HD
3
Level
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En 10
CINEMA DSP HD
3
for new surround format
In 2014, the new surround audio format that employs “object-based audio” was
announced (such as Dolby Atmos). With object-based audio, sounds can be allocated
freely in 3D space.
The algorithm for CINEMA DSP of this model has been renovated to support those
signals,
This can enhance the depth of 3D sound experiences and provide high-realistic
sensation to immerse you in movies.
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and
surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal
listening environment for maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting
various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.
YPAO-R.S.C.
In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a
smearing of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from
the walls or ceiling. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted
reflections and produces the acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume
level so that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.
YPAO
Compensation
Time
Level
YPAO Volume OFF
YPAO Volume ON
FrequencyLow High
Level High
En 11
YPAO 3D measurement
The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of
presence speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation
is applied to maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.
YPAO High Precision EQ
Apply 64-bit high-precision processing for full-band PEQ to reduce noise by error
component and 32-bit signal transmission (from DSP to D/A converter) to create
highly-natural surround sounds.
High-resolution music enhancer 32-bit
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 32-bit can be applied to lossless
44.1/48 kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further
heightening of the musicality in the original content (p.110).
Before processing
After processing
High-quality video processing
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played
back as a high-quality image (p.131).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.
Unrivaled audio and video quality
Frequency
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
Frequency
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
En 12
The best expandability in Yamaha
By connecting a power amplifier, you can enjoy the
highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel
3-dimensional sound field.
• Flexible connectivity (ready for balanced and
unbalanced connections)
• High-quality audio transmission (XLR balanced
pre-out)
• XLR balanced input jacks for connecting a high-end
CD player
Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.96) allows you to play back
different input sources in the room where the unit is
installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
(The following shows examples of use.)
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living
room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a
different room.
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room
(HDMI connection)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living
room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via
HDMI on a TV in a different room.
Useful applications
■ AV CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into
a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
commands and playback source.
Functions
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources)
• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
Expandable to meet diverse needs
Power amplifier
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
En 13
Front panel
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.133)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.134)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.135)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.137)
• An iPod is being charged (p.80)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.15).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.74).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
OPTION
ON SCREEN
DISPLAYRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
TONE/BALANCE
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
5V
1A
SCENE
123 4
RLAUDIO
HDMI IN
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
FM AM
TUNING
PRESET
4 5231
6
8
7
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
En 14
■ Inside of the front panel door
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.107).
B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.106).
C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.108).
Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.101).
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.73).
E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.69).
F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.67).
G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2–4 Enables/disables the audio output to
each zone (p.100).
ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone that is controlled by
the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.100).
H INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.106).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.60).
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.76).
Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.102).
J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.75).
K PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.76).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.102).
L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.75).
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.84) or an iPod
(p.80).
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.45).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.38).
ENTER
OPTION
ON SCREEN
DISPLAYRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
TONE/BALANCE
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
5V
1A
SCENE
123 4
RLAUDIO
HDMI IN
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
FM AM
TUNING
PRESET
(
CONNECT
)
BE JL9ACD HIK0FG
MNO P
En 15
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
2 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.57).
3 ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.100).
4 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
5 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.106).
6 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
7 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
8 VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.70) or the virtual surround
processing (p.72) is working.
9 Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a
Bluetooth
device
(p.79).
0 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.74) is
working.
A CINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.70) is
working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP
HD
3
is activated.
B STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
C PA RT Y
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.101).
D Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
E ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.108) is working.
F Channel indicators
Indicate channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are
output.
A Front (L)
S Front (R)
D Center
F Surround (L)
G Surround (R)
H Surround back (L)
J Surround back (R)
K Surround back
B Front presence (L)
N Front presence (R)
M Rear presence (L)
< Rear presence (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)
OUT
21 3
IN
VOLUME
MUTE
ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL
3
ZONE
2 3 4
SBLRPL SBRSB RPR
SW1
SL
SW2
SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
ENHANCER
PARTY
STEREO TUNED
HD
SLEEP
ZONE ZONE
87
DF
D
1
5
42
E
6
3
9 C0BA
En 16
Rear panel
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.37).
2 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multichannel output
and inputting audio signals (p.41).
3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.37).
4 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.35).
5 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.33). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.34), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.98).
6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(component/composite video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component or
composite video and outputting video signals (p.34) or for
connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3
(p.97).
7 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.35).
8 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.36).
9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.41).
0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.99).
A NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.40).
B Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.57).
C RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
D AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.42).
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
En 17
E AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting
audio signals (p.37).
F ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.97).
G ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.39).
H PRE OUT (RCA) jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.31) or
to a power amplifier (p.31).
I PRE OUT (XLR) jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.31) or
a power amplifier (p.30).
* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
En 18
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
SOURCE/RECEIVER key
Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is
operated with the remote control (p.152). You can operate
the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external
device when this key lights up in green.
SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
3 Display window
Displays remote control information.
4 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
TUNER FM/AM radio
BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth
connection (the unit as a
Bluetooth
receiver)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
PHONO PHONO jacks
MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks
[A], [B] Change the external device to operate with
the remote control without switching the input
source.
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.67).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.69).
7 External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.152).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.82).
A PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.76).
B TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.150).
C VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
D MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
E OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.107).
F LIGHT key
Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10
seconds.
G DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.106).
H Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.69).
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-AUX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP M ENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
D
E
G
F
1
4
2
5
3
6
C
7
B
8
7
:
9
H
A
En 19
■ Inside of the remote control cover
I Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.69).
J INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.106).
K Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
L ZONE key
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.100).
M PA RT Y k ey
Turns on/off the party mode (p.101).
N HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.66).
O Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio (p.75).
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
FM Switches to FM radio.
AM Switches to AM radio.
TUN./CH Select the radio frequency.
P SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
Q LEVEL key
Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.127).
R SETUP key
Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.149).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.149).
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-AUX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP M ENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PA RT Y
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
M
N
P
Q
R
I
K
J
L
O
En 20
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.21)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the power amplifier. For details
on speaker connections, refer to the instruction manual for the power amplifier.
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (p.30)
Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.33)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.35)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD
players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.39)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6
Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless
antenna (p.40)
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
7 Connecting other devices (p.41)
Connect external devices such as a device with analog multichannel output and a
device compatible with the trigger function.
8 Connecting the power cable (p.42)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.43)
Select the desired on-screen menu language.
10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings (p.44)
According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.
11
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.45)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit
your room (YPAO).
12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.57)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
En 21
The unit has 11.2-channel pre-amplifiers. You can connect 2- to 11-channel speakers (via a power amplifier) and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your
room.
You can also apply multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.96).
Functions of each speaker
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.
Ideal speaker layout
1 Placing speakers
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Front (L) 1
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Front (R) 2
Center 3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and
vocals).
Surround (L) 4 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround
back speakers are connected.
Surround (R) 5
Surround back (L) 6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Surround back (R) 7
Front presence (L) E
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA
DSP HD
3
(p.70), the presence speakers create a natural
3-dimensional sound field in your room.
Front presence (R) R
Rear presence (L) T
Rear presence (R) Y
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
E
12
39
4
6
T Y
5
9
R
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
10°~30°10°~30°
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 22
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
• To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence
speaker layout” (p.26).
❑ 11.2-channel system [★7.1.4]
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.100), the rear presence left/right channel output is not available in the
main zone.
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”
setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44).
❑ 9.2-channel system [★5.1.4] (using rear presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker
(VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.100), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the
main zone.
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”
setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44).
E
9
R
12
39
45
6 7
T Y
E
9
R
12
39
45
T Y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 23
❑ 9.2-channel system [★7.1.2] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds
using the surround back speakers.
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as
the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before
performing YPAO (p.44).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as
the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before
performing YPAO (p.44).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
21
39
45
9
67
ER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 24
❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows
you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
❑ 5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for
7.1-channel contents.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 25
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)
Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as
the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before
performing YPAO (p.44).
45
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 26
❑ 2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
❑ Presence speaker layout
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear
Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your
listening environment.
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP HD
3
with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately.
Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom
sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of
front and rear sound spaces effectively.
• For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers”
(p.27).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 27
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from
speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
• Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled
speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Dolby Enabled speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a
reference.
When using two presence speakers When using four presence speakers
Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the
ceiling between extensions of front
speakers and listening position
Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the
front speakers and listening position
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the
listening position and surround (or
surround back) speakers
Caution
• Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
SBR
SBL
SL
SRFPR
FPL
FR
FL
C
SBR
SBL
SL
SRRPR
RPL
FPR
FPL
FR
FL
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 28
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long
to prevent signal quality degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and Ultra HD (4K)
video transmission features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or Ultra HD (4K) videos.
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance
blue (P
B), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
AV 1
HDMI cable
Y
P
R
P
B
AV 1
A
Component video cable
AV 1
Video pin cable
En 29
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable or an audio pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable).
❑ XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced
cable.
XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.
• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH
button on the unit and then pull the connector out.
XLR output jacks
Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.
• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of
the connector and then pull it out.
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
AUDIO 4
R
XLR balanced cable (male)
CENTER
PRE OUT
XLR balanced cable (female)
About the XLR jacks
• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.
XLR input jacks
3. COLD
3. COLD
2. HOT
2. HOT
XLR output jacks
1. GND
1. GND
En 30
Connecting a power amplifier
Connect the input jacks of your power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit so that
the audio source selected on the unit can be output to the power amplifier for playback.
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection for each channel
depending on the input jacks available on your power amplifier.
• The XLR jacks and RCA jacks for each channel output the same signals.
■ Balanced connection
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (XLR) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with XLR balanced cables.
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your power amplifier and verify
that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the power amplifier before making connections.
REAR
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCEBACK
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR)
1
(FRONT)
SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
4
COAXIAL COAXIAL
O
AXIAL
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
2
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
AM
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(REAR)
L
R R R R R
L L L L L
LR
XLR
XLR
The unit (rear)
PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks
(Female connector)
(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)
Power amplifier
Speaker
connections
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 31
■ Unbalanced connection
Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (RCA) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced
cables).
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
Connecting subwoofers
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection depending on the input
jacks available on your subwoofer.
• The XLR jacks and RCA jacks output the same signals.
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to
an AC wall outlet.
■ Balanced connection
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (XLR)
1–2 jacks of the unit with XLR balanced cables.
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your subwoofer and verify that
its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
NETWORK
HDMI
D
)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
FRON
T
PRES
EC
K
R
ROUND
BACK
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR)
1
(FRONT)
SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
FM
Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
1
2
E
OUT
ZONE 3
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
WIRELESS
R R
L L L L
LR
The unit (rear)
Main input
(RCA)
Power amplifier
Speaker
connections
PRE OUT
(RCA) jacks
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the subwoofer before making connections.
IN OUT
REMOTE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCEBACK
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR)
1
(FRONT)
SURROUND
E
AR
S
ENCE
RS-232C
L L L L
LR
99
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR)
1
(FRONT)
LR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
The unit (rear)
XLR input
SUBWOOFER
PREOUT (XLR)
1–2 jacks
XLR input
(Male connector)
(Female connector)
(Male connector)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 32
■ Unbalanced connection
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (RCA)
1–2 jacks of the unit with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables).
T
ARC
1
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 A
3 AV 4
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SURROUND FRONT CENTER
PRE OUT
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
CAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
R R R
99
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 33
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.
■ HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.34).
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.177).
■ Component/composite video connection
When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
3 Connecting a TV
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDI O 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDI O 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SU
R
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
FM
75Ω
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
A
FRONT
Y
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R R
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
(HDCP2.2)
ARC
21
HDMI
ARC
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
OPTICAL
1
HDMI
HDMI
OO
L
R
L
R
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI input
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 34
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.66).
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor
(p.98).
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDI O 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SURROUND FRON
T
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
AM
PRE OUT
SUB
W
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(F
R
(R
E
Y
P
B
P
R
P
R
P
B
Y
Y
AV 1
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R R R
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
P
B
P
R
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
R
L
R
L
O
O
YP
B
P
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDI O 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDI O 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SU
R
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
FM
75Ω
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
A
FRONT
Y
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R R
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
V
V
OO
R
L
R
L
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SU
R
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
FM
75Ω
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
A
FRONT
Y
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R R
HDMI
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
(HDCP2.2)
ARC
21
HDMI
HDMI
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 35
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.80)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.84)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.140) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),
COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source.
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.111) in the “Option” menu.
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices
N
M
I OUT
ARC
1
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV 3 AV 4
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SUB
W
2
(REAR)
SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
6
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
D
CP2.2)
R R R R
L L
R
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI (AV 1–7)
jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 36
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDI O 3
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SURROUND FRONT F
R
CENTER
PRE OUT
(1 BD/DVD)
43
COAXIAL COAXIALCOAXIAL
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
TRIG
G
OU
1
2
12V
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
S
UBWOOFER
CENTER
L
R R R R R
L
YPB PR
YPB PR
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
P
R
P
B
Y
Y
P
R
P
B
C C
OO
R
L
R
L
The unit (rear)
AV 1–3
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD
)
AV 1
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDI O 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BAC
SUR
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
75Ω
OPTICAL
ZON
E
ZONE 2
5
6
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 37
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.140) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL
(a, b, f) jacks to another input source.
• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that
its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.111) in the “Option” menu.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo (RCA)
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])
Analog stereo (XLR) AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR])
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDI O 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SU
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
FM
75Ω
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
A
FRONT
Y
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R R
R
L
PHONO
GND
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
L
R
L
R
C C
OO
R
L
R
L
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA],
AUDIO [XLR]) jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks
Audio output (PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
(Male connector)
(Female
connector)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 38
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.80) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.84).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
❑ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on
the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the
unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.33).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.
❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection
Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO)
jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
DISPLAYRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
5V
1A
RLAUDIO
HDMI IN
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
ENTER
DISPLAYRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
5V
1A
RLAUDIO
HDMI IN
V RL
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 39
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling the AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN
R
E
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SURROUND FRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R R R
L
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 40
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set
“Network Connection” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.135).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing the wireless antenna
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up
straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.57).
• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
NETWORK
AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
( 3
NET
)
P
R
WIRELESS
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
Internet
WIRELESS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 41
Connecting a device with analog multichannel output
You can connect an analog multichannel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
• The front channel output should be connected to the AUDIO 3 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.111) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a power amplifier or a
Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input
jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug cable.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.141) in the
“Setup” menu.
7 Connecting other devices
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
A
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
OPTICAL
5
6
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R
AUDIO 3
MULTI CH INPUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
AUDIO 3
(AUDIO) jacks
MULTI CH INPUT
jacks
Device with analog
multichannel output
(Subwoofer)
(Surround
back)
(Surround)
(Front)
Channel output
(Center)
NETWORK
M
I
AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
BACK
SURROU
N
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR) (FRONT)
SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
N
A
O
)
1
2
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
R
ROUND
B
ACK
NGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
( 3
NE
T
PR
PR
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
R
L L L
LR
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT 1–2
jacks
System
connector
jack
Yamaha
subwoofer
Power amplifier
(such as
Yamaha MX-A5000)
Trigger In
(+12V)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 42
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
8 Connecting the power cable
NETWORK
OUT
OTE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCEBACK
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR)
1
(FRONT)
SURROUND
AC IN
RS-232C
( 3
NET
)
WIRELESS
L L L
L
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 43
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
En 44
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.25)
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.26)
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker”
and then “Manual Setup”.
6
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel
system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”
“Layout” “Surround” (p.126).
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER.
When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos
playback
a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”
“Layout” “Front Presence” (p.126).
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence
speaker layout and press ENTER.
c If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its
layout in “Rear Presence”.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
En 45
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the power amplifier.
3
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN to select “CANCEL” and proceed to
Step 4.
4
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
5
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.
• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
ER
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
YPAO MIC
jack
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1
2
3
4
BL
U
ET
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
RETURN RETURN
RECEIVER z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 46
The following screen appears on the TV.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
6
If desired, select the measuring options.
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.46) or
“Angle/Height” (p.47) and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate
external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the
key in orange) and then use the cursor keys.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.51)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.48)
❑ Multi Position
Selects multi measure or single measure.
Settings
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround
sound. You can take measurements at up to 8
different positions in the room. The speaker settings
will be optimized to suit the area defined by those
positions (multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always
be fixed. Take the measurements at only one
position. The speaker settings will be optimized to
suit that position (single measure).
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 47
❑ Angle/Height
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.
Settings
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions + front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)
Single measure
Yes
Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will measure angle of
each speaker and height of the presence speakers at the listening
position, and correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can
create more effective sound fields.
No (default) Disables the angle/height measurement.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 48
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
measurement.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.55) or “Warning messages” (p.56).
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the
TV.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
(When angle/height measurement is disabled)
Proceed to Step 3.
(When angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.
2
Perform the angle/height measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Microphone base
Pole
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 49
c Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.53).
Microphone base
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 50
4
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.108) in the
“Option” menu.
6
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 51
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.55) or “Warning messages” (p.56).
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the
TV.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
3
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
(When angle/height measurement is disabled)
Proceed to Step 5.
(When angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 4.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 52
4
Perform the angle/height measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
c Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
position “1”.
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
Microphone base
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 53
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.53).
6
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
7
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.108) in the
“Option” menu.
8
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
2
3
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 54
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
• If there are speakers that cannot be detected, check the power amplifier
settings and connections.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.120).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with
the reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
Angle
(Horizontal)
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening
position
Height
Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1
2
3
4
BL
U
ET
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 55
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the corresponding speakers).
(This error message will be also displayed if you perform YPAO when the power amplifier is turned off.)
E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the rear presence speakers).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 56
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.53) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
The pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the unit and power
amplifier are not same.
Check the pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the power amplifier. If they are not compatible with the pin
assignments of the unit (p.29), change the pin assignment setting of the power amplifier or use unbalanced
(RCA) connections.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.53) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m
(80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.53) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend
using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 57
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.58).
• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.40) or Wireless Direct (p.64).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.12) to
control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on
the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.64).
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.40) or the
wireless network connection (p.58).
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
–Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unit
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
En 58
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
Yes
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?
Yes
A (p.58)
B (p.60)
Does your wireless router
(access point) have a WPS
button?
C (p.61)
No
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1
2
3
4
BL
U
ET
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
En 59
9
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)
1
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.
2
Check the network currently selected and tap
“Next”.
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).
Wireless (WAC)
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see
“Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)
USB Cable
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing
the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)
The name of the unit
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 60
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable
If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.
1
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.
3
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
DISPLAYRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
5V
1A
RLAUDIO
The unit (front)
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1
2
3
4
BL
U
ET
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
En 61
■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS
button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.58).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching
for an access point. For details on settings, see
“Searching for an access point” (p.62).
Manual Setting
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.62).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point). The method is available if the wireless
router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code
method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN
code” (p.63).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1
2
3
4
BL
U
ET
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
En 62
❑ Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 63
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 64
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1
2
3
4
BL
U
ET
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
En 65
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.
Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64
hexadecimal digits.
10
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
12
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 66
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.75)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.79)
• Playing back iPod music (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.84)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.87)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.91)
• Playing back music via AirPlay (p.94)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.108).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.67).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.139), you can turn on/off
each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
Basic playback procedure
OUT 1+2
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
¡¡¡OUT¡1+2
HDMI¡OUT¡Sel.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
M
EM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
HDMI OUT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
MUTE
VOLUME
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 67
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.114).
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE (SCENE key)
Input
Input (p.66) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Audio Select (p.111) Auto Auto — —
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.66) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2
Mode
Sound Program (p.69) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 11ch Stereo 11ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.129) Auto Auto Auto Auto
Enhancer (p.74) Off On On On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.110) --- On On On
1
2
3
4
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
ENTER
SCENE
Cursor keys
En 68
Configuring scene assignments
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
3
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the
display window on the remote control.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.151) to register it.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.115) in the “Scene” menu.
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.116) in the “Scene” menu.
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
¡SET¡Complete
¡¡¡¡SCENE1
Sound
Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,
Extra Bass
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift,
Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim
Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment
Vol ume Master Volume
Lipsync Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SCENE
Input selection keys
En 69
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• MOVIE THEATER category (p.70):
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
• ENTERTAINMENT category (p.71):
Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• CLASSICAL category (p.71):
Press CLASSICAL repeatedly.
• LIVE/CLUB category (p.72):
Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly.
• STEREO category (p.72):
Press STEREO repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback.
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel
sources (p.73).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
• This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original
channels (p.73).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
•Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.74).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.74).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “DSP Program” menu (p.117).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
channel indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.143).
Selecting the sound mode
About Dolby Atmos
®
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or
multichannel PCM format in the following situations.
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.72) does not work.
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
INPU
T
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
OT
H
TUNER
US
B
NET
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SCE
N
E
1
2
3
4
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
PTI
O
N
SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
En 70
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD
3
)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP HD
3
). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
PL PR
VOLUME
SW1
SL SR
CL R
3
HD
FPL FPR
VIRTUAL
Hall¡in¡Vienna
¡¡CLASSICAL
¡¡MUSIC
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
En 71
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program
adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of
background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer
for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the
reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as
providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.
The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will
not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
Pavilion
This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness
of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the
live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more
exciting.
Disco
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also
characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.
Hall in Munich A
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
Hall in Munich B
This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a
shoe-box type concert hall with around 1,300 seats. The hall is constructed
from marble, resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling
causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual.
Hall in Frankfurt
This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2,400 seats located
in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual
seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.
Hall in Stuttgart
This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2,000 seats located in
downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left
of listeners has a powerful presence.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Hall in USA A
This is a large 2,600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a
fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the
American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully
reinforced.
Hall in USA B
This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2,600. The
ample resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by
longer than average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector
suspended above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from
the direction of the stage.
Church in Tokyo
The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate
reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for
reproducing church organ and choral music.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
En 72
❑ LIVE/CLUB
❑ STEREO
• CINEMA DSP HD
3
(p.70) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.72) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”
is selected.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.25) and enjoy multichannel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Village Gate
This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a
basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center left of the hall.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Arena
This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect
sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
11ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
En 73
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.72) works when multichannel source is played back.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system
and the selected decode type (p.118).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.170).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing
(such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.72) does not work.
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back
speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except
when a Dolby Atmos content is played).
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
¡¡¡STRAIGHT
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE
¡SUR.¡DECODE
bSurround
Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all
sources. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos
content) is played.
bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
OT
H
TUNER
US
B
NET
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SCE
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
En 74
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.110) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
VOLUME
L R
¡PURE¡DIRECT
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
ENHANCER
“ENHANCER” lights up
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
OT
H
TUNER
US
B
NET
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SCE
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
En 75
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia model only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press FM or AM to select a band.
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.111) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
FM50/AM9
TUNER FRQ STEP
VOLUME
FM 87.50MHz
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1 2
3
4
BLUE
TO
OT
H
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SCE
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
I
NF
O
PA
RT
Y
LEVE
L
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
TUN./CH
FM
AM
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 76
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.78).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.75)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.78).
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
Preset OK
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset
Preset number
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz
02:Empty
Preset
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
STEREO TUNED
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
B
L
U
ET
O
OT
H
US
B
NE
T
P
H
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 77
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.78).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
Program Type
Info
Item name
STEREO TUNED
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
CLASSICS
FM 98.50MHz
Information
Frequency (always displayed)
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
TP FM101.30MHz
TrafficProgram
Finished
Traffic information station (frequency)
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1 2
3
4
B
L
U
E
TO
OT
H
TUNER
U
S
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
INFO
OPTIONOPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 78
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.77), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1
2
3
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 79
You can play back music files stored on a
Bluetooth
device (such
as smartphones) on the unit.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.174).
Playing back
Bluetooth
device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a
Bluetooth
connection
between a
Bluetooth
device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the
Bluetooth
device on the unit.
• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.
2
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network
name of the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will
be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish
another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– In the “Setup” menu, select “Bluetooth” “Audio Receive”
“Disconnect”.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work
depending on the Bluetooth device).
Playing back music via Bluetooth
The unit
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
P
RE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
OGR
A
M
V
OLUME
MUTE
TO
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
BLUETOOTHBLUETOOTH
External device
operation keys
En 80
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174).
• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay
(p.94)
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is
charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is
set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playing back iPod music
DISPLAYRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
5V
1A
The unit (front)
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
Connected
USB
En 81
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.82).
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 82
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback.
■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself to start playback.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
MODE
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 83
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 84
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this
case, use the wired network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.174).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
DISPLAYRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
5V
1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
Connected
USB
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
USB
En 85
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102).
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 86
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 87
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.40). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
❑ For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
❑ For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 88
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102).
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 89
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.90) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.90) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.113).
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 90
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 91
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.40). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102).
Listening to Internet radio
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 92
■ Browse screen
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.93).
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Bookmark On
Adds the station selected in the list to the
“Bookmarks” folder (p.93).
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 93
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1
Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.
The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.
■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.144) in the
“Information” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (
❤
+) next to the station name.
• To unregister a station, select “My Favorites” in the Home screen, and then
click the “Remove” icon (
❤
–) next to the station name.
You can switch the language.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 94
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.105).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playing back music via AirPlay
PC
iTunes
iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
Router
(wired or wireless)
The unit
(wired or wireless)
iTunes (example) iPod iOS6 (example)iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
En 95
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.113) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
Menu Function
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 96
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the
guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Multi-zone configuration examples
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Connections
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.97
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.97
TV (for digital video playback): p.98
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.97
❑
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Connection
TV: p.98
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in
each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.176).
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that
you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone
connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Audio
(ZONE OUT)
Living room (main zone)
Guest room
(Zone2 or Zone3)
Audio
(ZONE OUT)
Video
(ZONE OUT or HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Video/audio
(HDMI)
En 97
Preparing the multi zone system
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
■ Connecting an external amplifier and speakers to play
back audio
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin
cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.
■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the
video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection
methods.
• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch
videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to
the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD
player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or
Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an external amplifier.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2
)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
O 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SURROUND FRON
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
43
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
H
INPUT
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
AM
PRE OUT
SUB
W
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(F
R
(
R
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
AV 1
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUR. BACK
L
R R R R R
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
A
RC
1
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV
6
AV 4
ONT
ESENCE BACK
SURROUND
SURROUND FRONT CENTER
PRE OUT
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
L
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
P
R
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
R R R
YPB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
PB PR
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
V
V
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT jacks
(COMPONENT
VIDEO or VIDEO)
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
Video input
(component video or
composite video)
En 98
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at
Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in
another room (Zone4).
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to
the unit with an HDMI cable (p.35).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4.
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
OPTICAL
5
6
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R
(ZONE OUT)
2
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone4
Main zone
HDMI input
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
Zone2 or Zone4
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
En 99
■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for
each device before using (p.149).
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
NETWOR
K
HDMI
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
K
R
OUND
B
A
S
U
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR) (F
SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
FM
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
1
2
OUT
ZONE 3
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
RS
-
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
M
ONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
R R
L L L
LR
IN OUT
REMOTE
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Infrared
signal
receiver
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
Infrared signal
transmitter
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
En 100
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
1
Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone.
Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated
switches.
2
Press RECEIVER z.
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled
or disabled.
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding
zone indicator lights up in the front display.
• When Zone3 output is enabled, the rear presence left/right channel output is
not available in the main zone.
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,
see “Multi-zone output” (p.176).
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.75)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.79)
• Playing back iPod music (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.84)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.87)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.91)
• Playing back music via AirPlay (p.94)
• You can also use the web control (p.103) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is
ongoing in the main zone.
• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.103) or AV CONTROLLER
(p.12).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the
Zone2/Zone 3 input or use the party mode (p.101).
RECEIVER
Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected)
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
UP
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
ZONE
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
Input selection keys
En 101
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4
The following functions are also available when the zone you want
to operate is enabled.
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min,
30 min, off).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party
mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.
Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as
background music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode
Set” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu.
• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main
zone.
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
B
L
U
E
TO
OT
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
PR
O
GR
A
M
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
9
SLEEP
PARTY
MUTE
VOLUME
SCENE
En 102
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.
• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.93).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2
Press MEMORY.
• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
2
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number
(01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET to select a shortcut.
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not
connected to the unit.
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not
connected to the network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of
service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
–A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,
the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
VOLUME
SBLRPL SBRSBRPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
01:Empty
Memory Preset
Shortcut number (flashes)
VOLUME
SBLRPL SBRSB RPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
02:Empty
Memory Preset
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
VOLUME
SBLRPL SBRSBRPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
01:USB
Recall Preset
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
T
U
NE
R
P
H
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
MEMORYMEMORY
PRESETPRESET
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
Numeric keys
En 103
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.135) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 7.x
1
Start the web browser.
2
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.105) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.
• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.136), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.
• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.
– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.12).
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
Web browser
Web control
PC
Router The unit
Web control
(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)
En 104
■ Top menu screen
1 CONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
2 STATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
3 SETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.
4 PA RT Y M ODE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.101).
5 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
6 MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
■ Control screen
1 PLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
2 TOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 SCENE
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
4 POWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
5 VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
6 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
2
1
4
3
5
6
En 105
■ Settings screen
1 Rename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.136) or the name of each zone
(p.137). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Network
Selects the network connection method (p.134) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.135). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.94). Click “APPLY” to apply the
changes to the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.136) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.135).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
2
1
3
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
En 106
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.77).
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
Audio Decoder
Info
Item name
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE
¡ AV1
Information
Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
B
L
U
E
TO
OT
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
ENTER
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
S
ET
U
PZ
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
INFO
DISPLAY
En 107
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SW1
SL SR
CL R
Tone Control
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and
low-frequency range of sounds.
108
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 108
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the
volume is adjusted.
108
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 109
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 109
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 109
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. 109
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 110
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).
110
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Video Mode
(V.M)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
110
Video Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 110
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 111
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
111
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source.
111
En 108
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass
(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.45).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
111
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
77
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.83),
USB storage device (p.86), or media server (p.90).
—
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.83),
USB storage device (p.86), or media server (p.90).
—
Item Function Page
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
En 109
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0
to 3
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) is selected when front
presence speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.70) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0
to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0
dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Ideal position
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.
On (On) Enables Extra Bass.
En 110
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.74).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• Compressed Music Enhancer works on the main zone, Zone2 and Zone3.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.74).
Settings
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in
“Adjustment” (p.132) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
1 to 6
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
On (On)
Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio
signal processing condition.)
Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.
Video Mode (V.M)
Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
En 111
■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
Configures the input settings.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0
dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made
for one input source.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Auto (Auto)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR])
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO (RCA or XLR).
Video Out (V.Out)
Off (Off) Does not output video.
AV 1–7 (AV1–7),
V-AUX (V-AUX)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
En 112
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 113
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 113
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
113
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
113
Balance Input
Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance
input to avoid sound distortion.
114
Ultra Low Jitter PLL
Mode
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function. 114
En 113
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
En 114
■ Balance Input Attenuator
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you
can avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V
(RMS) or higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.37).
Input source
AUDIO 4
Settings
■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned),
AirPlay, SERVER, NET RADIO, (network services), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.67) using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
Bypass Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
ATT.(-6dB)
Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level
(-6dB).
Off Disables the jitter elimination function.
Level 1
, Level 2,
Level 3
Enables the jitter elimination function.
The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio
interruptions on some playback devices depending on the audio clock
conditions. In this case, select lower level.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En 115
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.68).
■ Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177).
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 115
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
115
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 116
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 116
Device Control
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if
an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
En 116
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the
settings currently assigned to the selected scene.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio
with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)
and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Choices
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.67) for the selected scene.
Detail
Input Input (p.66), Audio Select (p.111)
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.66)
Mode
DSP Program (p.69), Pure Direct Mode (p.129), Enhancer (p.74),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.110)
Sound
Tone Control (p.108), YPAO Volume (p.108), Adaptive DRC (p.108),
Extra Bass (p.109)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.130), Dialogue Lift (p.109), Dialogue Level
(p.109), Subwoofer Trim (p.109)
Video Video Mode (p.131), Video Adjustment (p.110)
Volume Master Volume (p.66)
Lipsync Lipsync (p.128), Delay (p.129)
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.124), PEQ Select (p.127)
Check or uncheck
En 117
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)
En 118
DSP Program menu items
• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround
decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be
used in combination with the
selected sound program.
bSurround*,
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie),
bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*),
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Higher to enhance the sound field
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and presence sound
field generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround sound
field generation.
1ms to 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround back
sound field generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of
the presence sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence
sound field.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the reflectivity,
and lower to reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround
sound field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround
back sound field.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and reverberant
sound generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the
reverberant sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.
Item Function Settings
En 119
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “11ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto
, Off
11ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0
to +5
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.
0 to 5
to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off
, On
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bSurround Center Spread
Selects whether to
spread the center
channel signals to left
and right when
2-channel source is
played.
Off
, On
Select “On” to spread center
channel signals to left and right if
you feel the center sound is too
strong when 2-channel source is
played.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off
, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 3
to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to 0
to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En 120
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 121
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 45
Manual Setup
Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 124
Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 124
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 124
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 124
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 125
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 125
Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 125
Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size. 125
Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 125
Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers. 126
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 127
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 127
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 127
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 128
En 122
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 128
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 128
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 129
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 129
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 129
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 129
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 129
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 129
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD
3
.
130
Virtual Presence Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 130
Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 130
DAC Digital Filter Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter). 130
Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. 130
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 131
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 133
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 133
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 134
Network
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 134
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 135
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 135
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 136
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 136
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enables/disables the
Bluetooth
functions. 137
Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the
Bluetooth
connection between the
Bluetooth
device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 79
Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from
Bluetooth
devices (
Bluetooth
standby). 137
Menu Item Function Page
En 123
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 137
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 138
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 138
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 138
Audio Delay Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3. 138
Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 138
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 138
Zone4 Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 139
Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 139
HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 139
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 139
Function
Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 140
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 140
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 140
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 141
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 141
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 141
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 142
ECO Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 142
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 143
Menu Item Function Page
En 124
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1
, Pattern2
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
Front
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Center
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
En 125
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Surround" is set to "None", or when “Layout (Surround)" is set to
"Front".
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Surround
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Surround Back
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Front Presence
Large Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Rear Presence
Large Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Use
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER
1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER
1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and
“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
En 126
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and
subwoofers.
Surround
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Front Presence
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
Rear Presence
Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to
“None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
Subwoofer
Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
Layout
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side
of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.72) works in this case.
Front Height
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the
front side wall.
Overhead
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front
presence speakers.
Rear Height
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the
rear side wall.
Overhead
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear
presence speakers.
Left + Right
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right
sides of the room.
Front + Rear
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear
sides of the room.
Monaural x2
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
En 127
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00
m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0
dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Adjusting while viewing the front display
a Press LEVEL.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker.
c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker.
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.45). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.45) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the
front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
En 128
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4
Settings
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Delay Enable
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto/Manual Select
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
En 129
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0
ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic
adjustment and fine adjustment.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.74).
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Adjustment
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level
(-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the
selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the
on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the
wall paper is displayed.
Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
En 130
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD
3
(p.70). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
HD
3
functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo).
Settings
■ Virtual Presence Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front
presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence
speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.70).
Settings
• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set
“Virtual Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Settings
• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
■ DAC Digital Filter
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have
favorite sounds.
Settings
■ Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos
contents.
Settings
Off
Disables CINEMA DSP HD
3
.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP HD
3
.
Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On
Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Sharp Roll-off Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation
characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Slow Roll-off Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation
characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Short Latency Type
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
Disable
Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be
played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.
Enable
Enables playback of object-based audio signals.
En 131
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments).
Settings
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.147) in
the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.
Direct Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
Resolution
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Aspect
Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
En 132
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You
can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0
to 50
Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0
to 50
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0
to +100
Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Setting range
-100 to 0
to +100
Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to 0
to +100
Adjustment
En 133
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.177).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–3
Default
AUDIO 1
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Enables/disables ARC (p.178) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) is set to “Main”.
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected
to the unit.
Settings
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
TV Audio Input
ARC
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Standby Sync
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Amp
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
En 134
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Settings
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is
set to the power saving mode.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.40).
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.58).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the
unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.64).
En 135
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
DHCP
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
En 136
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
• AirPlay (p.94) and DMC (p.113) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Filter
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit.
MAC Address 1–10
En 137
Bluetooth
Configures the
Bluetooth
settings.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the
Bluetooth
function (p.79).
Settings
■ Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from
Bluetooth
devices (
Bluetooth
standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the
Bluetooth
device.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.135) is set to “Off”.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Off Disables the
Bluetooth
function.
On
Enables the
Bluetooth
function.
Off Disables the
Bluetooth
standby function.
On
Enables the
Bluetooth
standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Zone Rename
En 138
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is
synchronized with the video.
Setting range
0 ms
to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.137).
Volume
Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Audio Delay
Mono
Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Zone Rename
En 139
■ Zone4 Set
Configures the Zone4 settings.
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.137).
■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main
, Zone2, Zone3
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main
, Zone2, Zone4
• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.176).
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.101) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
Settings
Zone Rename
Audio Output
On Enables the audio output.
Off
Disables the audio output (video output only).
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
En 140
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Dimmer (Front Display)
Short Message
On Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
En 141
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
Wallpaper
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Trigger Mode
Power
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source”.
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
Target Zone
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
Zone3
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
Zone4
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
En 142
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the auto-standby setting.
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
Off Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
En 143
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
English English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
En 144
Types of information
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■ Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
(When using Wireless Direct)
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE)
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address
(Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
vTuner ID vTuner ID
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.136)
Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
SSID The SSID of the wireless network
Security Security method
Security Key Security key
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address
Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication
En 145
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.159).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z
.
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.146)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.147)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia model only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.147)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
En 146
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
• Default settings are underlined.
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER.
3
Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER.
4
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
5
Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display
window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from Step 3.
6
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• The registered remote control codes (p.149) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Item Function Page
REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 146
REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 146
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia model only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
147
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 147
MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 147
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 147
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.
148
INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 148
FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 148
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 148
ON
Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.
ON
REMOTE SENSOR
ID1
REMOTE CON AMP
PRESET
5020
En 147
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
(Asia model only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.131) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Select the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps
and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
TUNER FRQ STEP
NTSC
TV FORMAT
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)
Depending on the connected devices or HDMI cables, videos may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.
YES
MONITOR CHECK
MODE 2
4K MODE
En 148
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
Choices
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.159).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.145) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
BACKUP
RECOV./BACKUP
CANCEL
INITIALIZE
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
USB
FIRM UPDATE
x.xx
VERSION
En 149
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to
sequentially operate multiple functions at once.
1
Press SETUP.
• If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control
automatically exits from the setup menu.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
Controlling external devices with the remote control
SETUP
PRESET
Item name
Item Function Page
LEARN
Assigns a function to each key by learning the
code from other remote controls.
152
PRESET
Registers the remote control code for external
devices.
150
RENAME
Edits the device names or scene names
displayed on the remote control’s display
window.
154
MACRO
Programs macro operations (sequence of
control commands).
155
CLEAR Clears the remote control configurations. 157
ERASE
Erases a function assigned to each key by
learning.
158
EX-IR
Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the
authorized custom installers only.
—
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
U
D
I
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-A
U
X
1 2
3
4
B
L
U
E
TO
OT
H
TUNER
U
S
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 150
Registering remote control codes
■
Registering the remote control code for a TV
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.151). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
1
Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the
CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
4
Press TV z and press ENTER.
5
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control code and press ENTER.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
6
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
❑ TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
PRESET
----
“----” (empty) or code currently registered
TV operation keys
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.
TV z Turns on/off the TV.
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
Z
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
M
O
D
E
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
B
L
U
ET
O
OT
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
P
H
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
TV operation keys
Numeric keys
Cursor keys
En 151
■ Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
• If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A] or
[B] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the
input source after pressing the key.
1
Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the
CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your
playback device.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.
4
Press a corresponding input selection key and
press ENTER.
For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV1 jack.
5
Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control and press ENTER.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.
6
To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4
and 5.
7
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.68).
PRESET
5098
Code currently registered
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
Z
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
En 152
❑ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in
orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control
operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your
playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work
after you register the remote control code, use the learning function
to assign a function to each key.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and
press ENTER.
3
Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
For TV: press TV z.
SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
MODE Switches between modes.
External device
operation keys
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
a
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
h
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
j
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.150).
LEARN
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
Z
O
N
E
S
LE
E
P
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
PRE
S
E
T
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
OT
H
TUNER
US
B
N
E
T
PHON
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SCE
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
MODE
DISPLAY
ENTER
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
TV operation keys
Numeric keys
External device
operation keys
External device
operation keys
En 153
4
Press ENTER.
5
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
6
Perform the following steps (a and b) within
10 seconds.
a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
assign a function.
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys
For TV: TV operation keys
b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned until “OK” appears in the display window.
If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4.
7
Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are
learned.
8
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be
decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display
window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the
new functions.
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-AU X
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
Remote control of external device
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart
Note
• If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
a Press SETUP.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER.
d Press RECEIVER z.
e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display.
f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
2 3
5
1
4 6
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
LEVE
L
Z
O
NE
S
LE
E
P
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
B
L
U
ET
O
OT
H
T
U
NE
R
US
B
NE
T
P
H
O
N
O
M
U
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
MODE
DISPLAY
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
TV operation keys
Numeric keys
External device
operation keys
External device
operation keys
En 154
Editing device names
You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the
remote control’s display window.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and
press ENTER.
3
Press one of the following keys to select a device or
a scene.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected).
For TV: press TV z.
For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z.
For scene: press one of the SCENE keys.
• To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press
ZONE to select a zone.
4
Press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to rename.
To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r).
To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space,
symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w).
6
Press ENTER to register the new name.
Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK”
appears in the display window.
7
To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat
Steps 3 to 6.
8
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
RENAME
BD/DVD
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
DIRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
ECEIVE
R
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
ZONE
TV z
ENTER
SCENE
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 155
Operating multiple functions at once
(macro)
The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple
functions at once.
For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the
CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and
start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key
operation.
■ Enabling the macro operations
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press
ENTER.
4
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
• To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3.
By default, the following macro operations are available after
pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are
enabled.
MACRO
ON
Macro operation key
Macro operations
1st command 2nd commend
RECEIVER z Turns on the unit. (unregistered)
Input selection keys Turns on the unit.
Selects the
corresponding input
source. (unregistered
for the [A] and [B] keys)
RECEIVER
“MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled)
RECEIVER
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
DE
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
M
EM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
SETUP
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 156
■ Programming macro operations
You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each
macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro
operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out
sequentially according to the programmed remote control
commands.
• Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control
codes (p.150) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.152).
• We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume
adjustment) in macro operations.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and
press ENTER.
4
Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or
input selection key) to which macro operations are
assigned and press ENTER.
“MACRO 1” appears in the display window.
5
Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to
include in the macro operations in sequence.
To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control,
press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
(Example)
Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as
the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to
“AV1” and dturning on the TV
a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z.
b (MACRO 2) Press AV1.
c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“AV1” and press SOURCE z.
d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“TV” and press TV z.
6
To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK”
appears on the window display.
If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and
the setting is confirmed automatically.
7
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
MACRO
EDIT
MACRO1
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
PRE
S
E
T
SCE
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
RECEIVER z
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Input selection keys
Cursor keys
En 157
Resetting the remote control configurations
■ Clearing the remote control configurations
You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of
settings or clear all the remote control configurations.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to
be cleared and press ENTER.
“ALL” appears in the display window.
To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys,
proceed to Step 5.
To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4.
• When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared.
You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5.
4
Press a key to which the selected process is
applied.
When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the
input selection key or TV
z.
When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection
key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE.
When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation
key (input selection key or RECEIVER z).
5
Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the
window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
6
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
LEARN
Clears the functions learned from other remote
controls.
PRESET Restores the default remote control code settings.
RENAME Restores the default device name settings.
MACRO Clears the macro operation settings.
RESET
Clears all remote control configurations and restores
default settings.
CLEAR
PRESET
ALL
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
ENHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
INF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
SCENE
RECEIVER z
Input selection keys
Cursor keys
En 158
■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by
learning
You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and
restore the default key assignments.
1
Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and
press ENTER.
3
Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
4
Press ENTER.
5
Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on
the window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.
6
Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key
assignments are erased.
7
To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
ERASE
2 3
5
1
46
TUN./ CH
ENHANCER
SUR.
DECODE
HDMI OUT
MEMORY
INFO AM
PAR TY
FM
0
10
LEVELENT
SETUPZONE
87
SLEEP
9
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
2
3
5
1
4
6
T
U
N.
/
CH
E
NHAN
CE
R
SUR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
HDMI
OU
T
MEM
O
RY
I
NF
O
AM
PA
RT
Y
FM
0
10
LEVE
L
EN
T
Z
O
NE
8
7
S
LE
E
P
9
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
C
H
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
SCE
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
TV z
ENTER
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 159
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.148).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.145). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.148).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
CLASSICAL
LIVE
CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO STRAIGHT
INPUT
PURE
DIRECT
MUTE
TV
TV VOL
MODE
TV CH
PRESET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AV
AUDIO
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
V-A UX
1 2 3 4
BLUETOOTH
TUNER
USB NET
PHONO
MULTI
[ B ][ A ]
SCENE
1 2 3 4
PROGRAM
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
RETURN DISPLAY
POP-UP/MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
CLASSICAL
C
LA
SS
I
C
A
L
LIVE
C
L
UB
ENTE
RT
AI
T
T
N
M
O
VI
E
S
TERE
O
S
TRAI
G
HT
INPU
T
PUR
E
D
IRE
CT
MUTE
TV
TV
VO
L
M
O
D
E
TV
CH
PRE
S
E
T
SOU
R
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
AV
A
UDI
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
BLUE
T
O
O
T
H
TUNER
US
B
NE
T
PH
O
N
O
MU
LT
I
[
B
]
[
A
]
SC
E
N
E
1
2
3
4
PR
O
GR
A
M
V
O
LUME
MUTE
T
O
P
MENU
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
O
N
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
O
N
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 160
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.45). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.124).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.129). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 or Zone3 (p.138).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.129). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.138).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.111).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.140) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.142).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.146).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
En 161
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit and power amplifier, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, power amplifier, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC
wall outlets securely.
b The unit, power amplifier, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.142).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
En 162
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key
lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.146).
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
The remote control is set to control the unit.
Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
Set the remote control code again (p.149). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.152).
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control.
Learning is impossible in this case.
Memory capacity is full.
Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.158).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 163
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.129).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.128).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.124).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.127).
The speaker cable connecting the power amplifier and the speaker
is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the power
amplifier may be malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.128).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”
menu to “Use” (p.125).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.133).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
En 164
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.33).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.133).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.133). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is
disabled.
Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.139).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume.
The input signal level is too high when AUDIO 4 (XLR) is selected
as the input source.
Adjust the output signal level on the playback device or use “Balance Input
Attenuator” in the “Input” menu (p.114).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is interrupted.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.98).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 165
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.147).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.179).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both
the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the
VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the
playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.35).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.33).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
The video is interrupted.
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.66).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.98).
En 166
FM/AM radio
Bluetooth
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.111).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.75).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.75).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.76).
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The
Bluetooth
function of the unit is disabled. Enable the
Bluetooth
function (p.137).
Another
Bluetooth
device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current
Bluetooth
connection and then establish a new connection
(p.79).
The unit and the
Bluetooth
device are too far apart. Move the
Bluetooth
device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The
Bluetooth
device does not support A2DP. Use a
Bluetooth
device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the
Bluetooth
device is
not working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the
Bluetooth
device, and then establish a
connection between the
Bluetooth
device and the unit again (p.79).
En 167
USB and network
No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.
The volume of the
Bluetooth
device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the
Bluetooth
device.
The
Bluetooth
device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the
Bluetooth
device to the unit.
The
Bluetooth
connection has been terminated.
Establish a
Bluetooth
connection between the
Bluetooth
device and the unit again
(p.79).
The unit and the
Bluetooth
device are too far apart. Move the
Bluetooth
device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.135). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.135).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
En 168
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.87).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.136).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.87).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.136).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.148).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 169
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.87).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.80).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.40).
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.146).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.146).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.87). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 170
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the
Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces
audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically
throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the
introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is
decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker
systems of every size and configuration.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Enabled Speaker
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology
employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the
listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that
can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall
speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby
surround playback.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1
content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional
speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or
products with Dolby speaker technology.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.
This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
Glossary
En 171
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from
channels, DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive
soundscape - in front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X
offers the ability to automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a
television’s built-in speakers to a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a
commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to
DTS:X to provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound
Bars, Neural:X can produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
En 172
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of
digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“
http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
En 173
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
CINEMA DSP HD
3
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP HD
3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in
your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear
sound filed of CINEMA DSP.
En 174
■ Supported devices
❑ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports
Bluetooth
devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
•A
Bluetooth
device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be
compatible, depending on the model.
❑ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
❑ iPod
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of July 2015)
■ File formats
❑ USB/PC (NAS)
* Linear PCM format only
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Supported devices and file formats
Made for.
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of July 2015)
File
Sampling
frequency (kHz)
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 —
En 175
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m: Available
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p 4K
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p
480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
mmmm
1080p/24 Hz
mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm m
720p mmmm m
1080i mmmm m
1080p m
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO outVIDEO in
En 176
Multi-zone output
■ Audio output
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the
main zone is selected)
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input with the web
control (p.103) or use the party mode (p.101)
■ Video output
m: Available
*8 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”
*9 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”
Out
In
ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)
Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*4) m (*5)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*6) m (*6) m (*6)
Analog audio
(AUDIO)
mmm
USB (including iPod)
(*7)
mmm
Network sources (*7) mmm
TUNER mmm
Out
In
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks
(*8)
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*9)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2 Zone4
HDMI video mm
Component video m
Composite video m
On-screen display
(browse/playback)
m
En 177
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.33) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.35).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.67)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.151)
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
RETURN DISPLAY
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
RETURN
D
I
S
P
L
AY
O
PTI
O
N
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
En 178
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.33).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.68), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).
En 179
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
En 180
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
R
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
REAR
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCE
FRONT
PRESENCEBACK
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
SUBWOOFER
2
(REAR)
1
(FRONT)
SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT FRONTCENTER
PRE OUT
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
MULTI CH INPUT
GND
AC IN
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
5
6
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
PRESENCE
REAR
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
(SINGLE)
(FRONT)
(REAR)
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
WIRELESS
(HDCP2.2)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SURROUND SUR. BACK
R
L
L
R R R R R
L L L L L
LR
(U.S.A. model)
En 181
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the
Symbol, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or
trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of
Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions
and limitations under the License.
Trademarks
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En 182
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
(FRONT L/R*, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
* barter to AUDIO 3
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
Component x 3 (AV 1–3)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)
•Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,
R.PRESENCE L/R)
- Pre Out (Balance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,
R.PRESENCE L/R) (1:GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)
- Subwoofer Out (Unbalance) x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- Subwoofer Out (Balance) x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
- Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- Composite x 1
- Component x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby Atmos
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
• Link Function: CEC supported
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Specifications
En 183
Bluetooth
• Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
•
Bluetooth
Version................................................. Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile................................................ A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec ..................................................... SBC, AAC
• Wireless Output
............................................ Bluetooth
Class 2
• Maximum Communication Distance....................... 10 m (33 ft)
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• WiFi function
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
and USB connection
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES),
Mixed Mode
- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
-Dolby Atmos
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- Dolby Surround
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Level/Impedance
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
Front L/R..............................................................1.0 V/470
Center..................................................................1.0 V/470
Surround L/R .......................................................1.0 V/470
Surround Back L/R ..............................................1.0 V/470
Front Presence L/R..............................................1.0 V/470
Rear Presence L/R ..............................................1.0 V/470
Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................1.0 V/470
Zone2/Zone3 .......................................................1.0 V/470
(XLR Balance Preout)
Front L/R..............................................................2.0 V/470
Center..................................................................2.0 V/470
Surround L/R .......................................................2.0 V/470
Surround Back L/R ..............................................2.0 V/470
Front Presence L/R..............................................2.0 V/470
Rear Presence L/R ..............................................2.0 V/470
Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................2.0 V/470
• Maximum Output Level (0.06%THD)
(RCA Unbalance Preout)
Front L/R............................................................4.0 V or more
Center ...............................................................4.0 V or more
Surround L/R .....................................................4.0 V or more
Surround Back L/R............................................4.0 V or more
Front Presence L/R............................................4.0 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ............................................4.0 V or more
Subwoofer 1–2 ..................................................6.5 V or more
Zone2/Zone3.....................................................4.0 V or more
(XLR Balance Preout)
Front L/R............................................................8.0 V or more
Center ...............................................................8.0 V or more
Surround L/R .....................................................8.0 V or more
Surround Back L/R............................................8.0 V or more
Front Presence L/R............................................8.0 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ............................................8.0 V or more
Subwoofer 1–2 ................................................13.0 V or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO ............................................................... 3.5 mV/47 k
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) .......................... 200 mV/47 k
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Attenuator Off................................................... 200 mV/100 k
Attenuator On................................................... 400 mV/100 k
• Headphone Impedance....................................... 16 or more
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO ..............................................................60 mV or more
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) ............................2.4 V or more
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Attenuator Off.......................................................2.4 V or more
Attenuator On.......................................................4.8 V or more
• Frequency Response (Pure Direct)
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB
En 184
• Total Harmonic Distortion
(Pure Direct, 1 V)
PHONO to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (1 kHz)....0.008% or less
AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
...........................................................................0.008% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted)
PHONO to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance)
............................................................................95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance)
..........................................................................112 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Preout (RCA Unbalance).....................................2.5 µV or less
Preout (XLR Balance) ..........................................5.0 µV or less
• Channel Separation
PHONO (Input 1 k Shorted, 1kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................. 86 dB/68 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................. 86 dB/68 dB or more
• Maximum Gain (Volume: Maximum)
Main Zone Preout ............................................................14 dB
Zone2/Zone3 Preout ........................................................14 dB
• Volume Control
Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut .....................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut .....................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type........................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75
Component
Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75
Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
.......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia model] .................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) ....................................65 dB/64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input................................................75 unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia model]............................ 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Taiwan model]................................ AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Other models] ................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption.......................................................... 65 W
• Power Consumption (No Signals).....................................35 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
.........................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby Off
(HDMI No Signals)............................................................1.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired............................................................................2.2 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................2.2 W
Wireless Direct ............................................................. 2.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On
(Wired), Bluetooth Standby On
.........................................................................................2.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
.........................................................................................3.1 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
......................435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
•
Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
......................435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”)
• Weight ........................................................... 13.5 kg (29.8 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
En 185
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!) 145, 159
Lock icon (o) 142
Numerics
11.2-channel system 22
11ch Stereo 72
2.1-channel system 26
2ch Stereo 72
4K Ultra HD 179
7.1-channel system 23
9.2-channel system 22
A
Adaptive DRC 108
ADVANCED SETUP 145
AirPlay 94
AM radio 75
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 33
, 178
Audio Decoder (front display information) 106
Auto Power Standby 142
Auto Preset (FM radio) 78
B
Backing up/recovering the settings 148
Balanced connection 30
, 31
Basic speaker configuration 22
Bluetooth 79
Bluetooth Standby 137
Bookmark 93
C
CINEMA DSP 9, 70
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 130
Compressed Music Enhancer 74
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 45
D
Decoder Off (front display information) 106
Dialogue 109
, 144
Dimmer (Front Display) 140
DLNA 87
DMC 113
Dolby Atmos 22
, 44, 69, 130
DSP Program (front display information) 106
E
ECO 142
Error indication (front display) 169
External device control (remote control) 149
Extra Bass 109
F
Firmware update 148, 159
FM radio 75
Frequency step setting 75
, 147
Front display information 106
H
HDCP 38, 163, 165
HDMI OUT2 Assign 139
HDMI output selection 66
HDMI signal compatibility 179
Headphone 72
Hi-Res Mode 110
I
Initial Volume 129, 138
Input jack assignment 140
Input Trim (In.Trim) 111
Internet radio 91
iPod content playback 80
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 94
L
Lipsync 128
M
MAC Address Filter 136
Max Volume 129, 138
Memory Guard 142
Menu language selection 43
Multiple room playback 96
Muting 66
, 101
N
NAS content playback 87
Network Connection 134
Network information 144
Network Name 136
Network Standby 135
O
Option menu 107
P
Parametric EQ 127
Party mode 101
Power amplifier 30
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 76
Pure Direct 74
R
Radio Data System tuning 77
Remote control 18
Remote control ID 146
Rename 113
, 116, 137
Repeat 83
, 86, 90
Restoring the default settings 148
S
SCENE function 67
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format 147
Setup menu 120
Short Message 140
Shortcut (Registering favorite items) 102
Shuffle 83
, 86, 90
Signal information 144
Index
En 186
Sleep timer 101
sleep timer 19
Sound program 70
, 71
Standby Through 134
Straight decode 73
Subwoofer Trim 109
Surround decoder 73
T
Test Tone 128
Tone Control 108
Trigger function 41
, 141
Turntable 37
U
Unbalanced connection 31, 32
USB storage device content playback 84
V
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 25, 72
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 23
, 130
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 22
, 130
W
Wallpaper 141
Web control 103
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 58
, 134
Wireless Direct 64
, 134
WPS 60
, 172
X
XLR jacks 29
Y
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 45
YPAO Volume 108
Z
Zone 96, 137
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH133A0/EN

Documenttranscriptie

AV Pre-Amplifier Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Connecting a device with analog multichannel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 FEATURES 6 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 CINEMA DSP HD3 for new surround format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 45 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 PREPARATIONS 20 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 PLAYBACK 66 2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Connecting a power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Connecting subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 40 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 En 2 CONFIGURATIONS Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 112 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Playing back music via AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 96 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 143 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 145 Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 En 3 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 APPENDIX 160 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below.  Remote control  Batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) (x4) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round.  AM antenna  FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.  YPAO microphone  Microphone base Pole • The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. • In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples. *Using for angle/height measurement during YPAO.  Power cable • Some features are not available in certain regions.  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)  Setup Guide  Safety Brochure • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase. En 5 • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • Bluetooth • iPod/iPhone • USB • Media server (PC/NAS) • Internet radio • AirPlay . . . . . . Supports 2- to 11-channel balance/unbalance pre-out and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. p.79 p.80 p.84 p.87 p.91 p.94 • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.45 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or latest . p.70 multichannel sounds such as Dolby Atmos with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP HD3) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.74 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents iPod/iPhone/ Bluetooth device Speakers Audio (via power amplifier) Audio USB device HDMI Control 4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video Audio/Video TV BD/DVD player AV receiver (the unit) Playback of Dolby Atmos contents supported Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.22 . p.67 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control En 6 . p.177 Full of useful functions! ❑ Connecting various devices (p.35) ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.72) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.33) ❑ DAC Digital Filter (p.130) You can select the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite sounds. When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. ❑ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode (p.114) HDMI Control TV audio By adjusting the elimination level of jitter in digital audio, you can enhance the DAC accuracy of the unit. ❑ Operating external devices with the supplied remote control (p.150) Video from external device ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.57) You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control by registering the remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players). The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. ❑ Backlight illumination remote control The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate the remote control even in a dark home theater room. ❑ Object-based surround formats supported The unit supports the new surround formats: Dolby Atmos and DTS:X. (Firmware update is required to enable DTS:X playback. For details on update, visit the Yamaha website). Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct En 7 Useful tips I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.111). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.128). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.133). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.109). I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.43). I want to update the firmware... Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.148). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.159). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • Input settings (p.112) • SCENE settings (p.115) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.118) • Various function settings (p.121) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.144) • System settings (p.146) En 8 CINEMA DSP The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers. What is a sound field? CINEMA DSP HD3 We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place. Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP. By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of actually being in that scene.) In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial sense. This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”. Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field “CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field. Level Capability for reproducing reflections (when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected) CINEMA DSP HD3 CINEMA DSP 3D Time En 9 CINEMA DSP HD3 for new surround format YPAO In 2014, the new surround audio format that employs “object-based audio” was announced (such as Dolby Atmos). With object-based audio, sounds can be allocated freely in 3D space. YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically. The algorithm for CINEMA DSP of this model has been renovated to support those signals, This can enhance the depth of 3D sound experiences and provide high-realistic sensation to immerse you in movies. YPAO-R.S.C. Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the acoustic perfection for your listening environment. Level Compensation Time YPAO Volume YPAO Volume ON Level High YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so that you hear natural sounds even at low volume. YPAO Volume OFF Low En 10 Frequency High YPAO 3D measurement Unrivaled audio and video quality The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP. High-resolution music enhancer 32-bit Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 32-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the musicality in the original content (p.110). Loudness Before processing Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz signal (such as a CD) Frequency YPAO High Precision EQ After processing Playback bandwidth of a 88.2/96 kHz signal Loudness Apply 64-bit high-precision processing for full-band PEQ to reduce noise by error component and 32-bit signal transmission (from DSP to D/A converter) to create highly-natural surround sounds. Frequency High-quality video processing From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as a high-quality image (p.131). • Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing • Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection • Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement. En 11 Expandable to meet diverse needs The best expandability in Yamaha Multi-zone function Useful applications By connecting a power amplifier, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field. The multi-zone function (p.96) allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2). ■ AV CONTROLLER Power amplifier (The following shows examples of use.) Enjoying music using speakers in another room While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a different room. “AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source. Functions Study room (such as Zone2) • Power on/off and volume adjustment • Input, scene and sound mode selection • DSP Parameter adjustment Living room (main zone) Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection) • Flexible connectivity (ready for balanced and unbalanced connections) While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room. • High-quality audio transmission (XLR balanced pre-out) • XLR balanced input jacks for connecting a high-end CD player Kitchen (such as Zone4) Living room (main zone) En 12 • Playback control (including music selection for some sources) • For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT VOLUME INPUT ON SCREEN OPTION SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 3 MULTI ZONE PROGRAM INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING 4 ENTER RETURN ZONE 4 VIDEO AUX PHONES 5V 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.133) • Standby Through is enabled (p.134) • Network Standby is enabled (p.135) • Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.137) • An iPod is being charged (p.80) ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R HDMI IN 8 7 6 INPUT knob Opening the front panel door Selects an input source. 7 Front panel door For protecting controls and jacks (p.14). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. 3 Front display Displays information (p.15). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.74). En 13 • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 AB C ON SCREEN OPTION DE F GH SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 3 IJ K INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING L 4 (CONNECT) MULTI ZONE PROGRAM ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE 3 ZONE 4 VIDEO AUX PHONES 5V 1A M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.107). B DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.106). C TONE/BALANCE key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.108). Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.101). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.73). E PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.69). F SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.67). ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA N O VIDEO L AUDIO HDMI IN R P G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2–4 ZONE CONTROL N YPAO MIC jack Enables/disables the audio output to each zone (p.100). Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.100). H INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.106). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.60). I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.76). Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.102). J FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.75). K PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.76). Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.102). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.75). M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.84) or an iPod (p.80). En 14 For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.45). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. P VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.38). Front display (indicators) 1 2 5 4 3 A Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.57). 3 ZONE indicators Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.100). 4 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 5 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.106). 6 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 7 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 8 ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL FPL L C R FPR SL SW1 SW2 SR RPL SBL SB SBR RPR BC D 1 HDMI 7 MUTE VOLUME ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP 3 4 IN OUT 1 2 3 2 ENHANCER PARTY STEREO TUNED HD 3 90 6 DE 8 VIRTUAL F E ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.70) or the virtual surround processing (p.72) is working. 9 Bluetooth indicator Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.79). 0 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.74) is working. A CINEMA DSP indicator “CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.70) is working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated. B STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. C PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.101). D Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. En 15 Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.108) is working. F Channel indicators Indicate channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output. A Front (L) S Front (R) D Center F Surround (L) G Surround (R) H Surround back (L) J Surround back (R) K Surround back B Front presence (L) N Front presence (R) M Rear presence (L) < Rear presence (R) C Subwoofer (1) V Subwoofer (2) Rear panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D (U.S.A. model) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) (HDCP2.2) 2 1 1 (ZONE OUT) ARC HDMI OUT ARC AV 1 AV 2 2 AV 3 AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) AV 4 AV 2 NETWORK HDMI AV 3 AV 5 AV 4 AV 6 AV 5 AV 7 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS RS-232C AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) AC IN MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 AV 2 PHONO L(1 BD/DVD) AV 3 CENTER AV 1 4 (1 AV BD/DVD) AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ Y OUT ZONE MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT PY B COMPONENT VIDEO PR AV 3 PPRB Y PYB COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 C B PPRB AV 1 A GND Y R TRIGGER OUT PR 1 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR AV 2 SURROUND PHONO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) SUR. BACK Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 REMOTE 1 IN IN 1 REMOTE RS-232C 2 OUT OUT IN OUT 2 A B L L TRIGGER OUT PB AV 1 PR 4Y AV MULTI CH INPUT (SINGLE) PRE OUT AUDIO 3 ZONE OUT C AV D 3 (FRONT) CENTER 1 PR PB 2 12V ZONE OUT 0.1A 12V PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) 0.1A 1 L 2 R R 2 R R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL OPTICAL 5 COAXIAL 56 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ANTENNA FM HD75Ω Radio FRONT FRONT SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SUR. BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CENTER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT PRESENCE FRONT REAR PRESENCE SURROUND ANTENNA AM (REAR) SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 2 (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE (4 RADIO) AC IN (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM R R AUDIO 4 AUDIO 4 L L REAR R PRESENCE R REAR PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE R FRONT PRESENCE R SURROUND BACK R SURROUND BACK AM R SURROUND R SURROUND PRE OUT PRE OUT CENTER CENTER R FRONT R FRONT L FRONT L FRONT L SURROUND L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK L SURROUND BACK FRONT L PRESENCE L FRONT PRESENCE REAR L PRESENCE L REAR PRESENCE * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.37). 2 MULTI CH INPUT jacks For connecting to a device that supports multichannel output and inputting audio signals (p.41). 3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.37). 4 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.35). 5 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.33). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.34), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.98). 6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component/composite video) jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component or composite video and outputting video signals (p.34) or for connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.97). 7 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.35). 8 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.36). 9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.41). 0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.99). En 16 A NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.40). B Wireless antenna For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.57). C RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. D AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.42). (U.S.A. model) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) (HDCP2.2) 2 1 1 (ZONE OUT) ARC HDMI OUT ARC AV 1 AV 2 2 AV 3 AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) AV 4 AV 2 NETWORK HDMI AV 3 AV 5 AV 4 AV 6 AV 5 AV 7 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS RS-232C AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) AC IN MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 AV 2 PHONO L(1 BD/DVD) AV 3 CENTER AV 1 4 (1 AV BD/DVD) AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ Y OUT ZONE MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT PY B COMPONENT VIDEO PR AV 3 PPRB Y PYB COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 C B PPRB AV 1 A GND Y R TRIGGER OUT PR 1 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR AV 2 SURROUND PHONO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) SUR. BACK AUDIO 2 Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 3 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 REMOTE 1 IN IN 1 REMOTE RS-232C 2 OUT OUT IN OUT 2 A B L L TRIGGER OUT PB AV 1 AUDIO 3 ZONE OUT PR 4Y AV MULTI CH INPUT (SINGLE) PRE OUT C AV D 3 (FRONT) CENTER 1 PR PB 2 12V ZONE OUT 0.1A PRE OUT 12V (SINGLE) (FRONT) 0.1A 1 L 2 R R 2 R R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL OPTICAL 5 COAXIAL 56 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT FRONT SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SUR. BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CENTER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT PRESENCE FRONT REAR PRESENCE SURROUND ANTENNA ANTENNA FM AM HD75Ω Radio (REAR) SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 2 (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT PRESENCE REAR PRESENCE (4 RADIO) AC IN (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM R R AUDIO 4 AUDIO 4 L L REAR R PRESENCE R REAR PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE R FRONT PRESENCE R SURROUND BACK R SURROUND BACK AM R SURROUND R SURROUND R FRONT R FRONT PRE OUT PRE OUT CENTER CENTER L FRONT L FRONT L SURROUND L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK L SURROUND BACK FRONT L PRESENCE L FRONT PRESENCE REAR L PRESENCE L REAR PRESENCE * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. E E AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.37). F ZONE OUT jacks For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.97). F G H I G ANTENNA jacks I PRE OUT (XLR) jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.39). H PRE OUT (RCA) jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.31) or to a power amplifier (p.31). En 17 For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.31) or a power amplifier (p.30). Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 2 RECEIVER z key SOURCE RECEIVER Turns on/off (standby) the unit. SOURCE/RECEIVER key 3 Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is operated with the remote control (p.152). You can operate the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device when this key lights up in green. AV 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 3 Display window 3 MUTE 4 Input selection keys 4 VOLUME C D OPTION ON SCREEN E F ENTER RETURN DISPLAY G MODE 7 A CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT B TV VOL TV CH H 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.82). A PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.76). B TV operation keys Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV operations (p.150). Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks TUNER FM/AM radio BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) PHONO PHONO jacks MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks [A], [B] Change the external device to operate with the remote control without switching the input source. Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.67). 6 PROGRAM keys Select a sound program (p.69). MUTE 7 External device operation keys Select menus for external devices (p.152). 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. En Adjust the volume. D MUTE key 5 SCENE keys LIVE CLUB Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. C VOLUME keys Displays remote control information. POP-UP/MENU 9 : Turns on/off an external device. SCENE 6 8 SOURCE z key AUDIO 9 Menu operation keys 18 Mutes the audio output. E OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.107). F LIGHT key Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10 seconds. G DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.106). H Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.69). ■ Inside of the remote control cover I Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.69). SOURCE RECEIVER J INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.106). K Numeric keys AV 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. L ZONE key AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.100). M PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.101). SCENE 1 2 3 4 N HDMI OUT key Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.66). PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE O Radio keys TOP MENU Operate the FM/AM radio (p.75). MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets. FM Switches to FM radio. AM Switches to AM radio. TUN./CH Select the radio frequency. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER P SLEEP key RETURN I J DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH 4 TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE L O TUN./ CH PRESET K M N 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). Q LEVEL key Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.127). R SETUP key Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.149). P Q R • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device before using (p.149). En 19 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.21) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the power amplifier. For details on speaker connections, refer to the instruction manual for the power amplifier. 2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (p.30) Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.33) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.35) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.39) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna (p.40) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 7 Connecting other devices (p.41) Connect external devices such as a device with analog multichannel output and a device compatible with the trigger function. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.42) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.43) Select the desired on-screen menu language. 10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings (p.44) According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. 11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.45) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.57) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 Placing speakers The unit has 11.2-channel pre-amplifiers. You can connect 2- to 11-channel speakers (via a power amplifier) and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.96). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Function Front (L) 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 Surround back (R) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Rear presence (L) T Rear presence (R) Y Subwoofer 9 0.5 to 1 mR (1.6 to 3.3 ft) E 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1 2 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 9 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. 3 9 5 4 10°~30° Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.70), the presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. T Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room. Y 6 1.8 m (5.9 ft) • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). • The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds). • The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers. En 10°~30° 21 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. ❑ 9.2-channel system [★5.1.4] (using rear presence speakers) • To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark. E • (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26). 1 ❑ 11.2-channel system [★7.1.4] 9 E R 2 3 9 R 1 9 4 2 3 5 9 T 4 Y 5 T Y 6 This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. 7 This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. • When Zone3 output is enabled (p.100), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the main zone. • When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44). • When Zone3 output is enabled (p.100), the rear presence left/right channel output is not available in the main zone. • When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44). En 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ❑ 9.2-channel system [★7.1.2] (using surround back speakers) E ❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers) R 1 9 2 3 9 4 5 6 7 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. • When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44). • When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44). • This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field. En • This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field. 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers) ❑ 5.1-channel system This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) 4 ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) 5 9 Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). • When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44). En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ❑ 2.1-channel system ❑ Presence speaker layout The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment. • You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern. • You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately. Front Height/Rear Height Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall. It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively. Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). Overhead Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position. It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and rear sound spaces effectively. • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. • For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.27). En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Dolby Enabled SP Notes on installation of ceiling speakers Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers. When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference. It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers. When using two presence speakers FPR When using four presence speakers SR FPR FR RPR SR FR SBR C SBR C SBL FL SBL FL FPL SL FPL RPL SL • Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled speakers. Installation position Installation position Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and listening position Front presence speakers: the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position Rear presence speakers: the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back) speakers Caution • Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified contractor or dealer personnel for installation works. En 27 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. AV 1 HDMI cable Component video cable A Y • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. AV 1 PR PB ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and Ultra HD (4K) video transmission features. AV 1 • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or Ultra HD (4K) videos. Video pin cable En 28 ■ Audio jacks ❑ XLR jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. About the XLR jacks XLR input jacks Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR balanced cable until you hear a click. Digital optical cable XLR balanced cable (male) IO AUD 4 R Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. • When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button on the unit and then pull the connector out. XLR output jacks ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable or an audio pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable). XLR input jacks 2. HOT 1. GND 3. COLD ❑ COAXIAL jacks Digital coaxial cable • The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments. Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the XLR balanced cable until you hear a click. XLR balanced cable (female) UT EO PR TER N CE Stereo pin cable • When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of the connector and then pull it out. En 29 XLR output jacks 1. GND 2. HOT 3. COLD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers ■ Balanced connection Connecting a power amplifier Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE OUT (XLR) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with XLR balanced cables. Connect the input jacks of your power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit so that the audio source selected on the unit can be output to the power amplifier for playback. Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection for each channel depending on the input jacks available on your power amplifier. • Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your power amplifier and verify that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29). • We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit). • The XLR jacks and RCA jacks for each channel output the same signals. 2 R OAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER FRONT PRESENCE CENTER (REAR) The unit (rear) SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 2 REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA Caution 75Ω • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the power amplifier before making connections. L REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE FM SURROUND R BACK AM (4 RADIO) R SURROUND R FRONT PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (XLR) jacks L FRONT L SURROUND SURROUND L BACK XLR Speaker connections XLR (Male connector) Main input (XLR) 30 REAR L PRESENCE Power amplifier (Female connector) En FRONT L PRESENCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ■ Unbalanced connection Connecting subwoofers Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE OUT (RCA) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables). Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection depending on the input jacks available on your subwoofer. • We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit). • The XLR jacks and RCA jacks output the same signals. The unit (rear) Power amplifier HDMI (HDCP2.2) AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers, configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. WIRELESS AV 7 D) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR Caution B 1 REMOTE IN RS-232C Main input (RCA) OUT 2 A Y PB AV 1 E OUT C PR Y PB AV 3 PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER PR 12V 0.1A 1 2 R ZONE 3 FRONT (REAR) CENTER FRONT PRESENCE (REAR) • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the subwoofer before making connections. Speaker connections SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 2 REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA Ω FM RROUND CK AM R SURROUND (4 RADIO) R FRONT PRE OUT CENTER L FRONT PRE OUT (RCA) jacks L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK ■ Balanced connection FRONT L PRESE Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (XLR) 1–2 jacks of the unit with XLR balanced cables. • Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your subwoofer and verify that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29). REMOTE IN The unit (rear) RS-232C OUT XLR input R (REAR) SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 2 EAR SENCE 9 L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK R 2 (REAR) FRONT L PRESENCE SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 XLR XLR XLR XLR SUBWOOFER PREOUT (XLR) 1–2 jacks (Female connector) 31 9 REAR L PRESENCE (Male connector) En XLR input (Male connector) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ■ Unbalanced connection Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (RCA) 1–2 jacks of the unit with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables). The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) T 1 3 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 A (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB 9 PR 9 B A Y PB AV 1 PRE OUT ZONE OUT C PR Y (SINGLE) PB AV 3 PR (FRONT) 1 2 CAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER ANTENNA 75Ω FRONT PRESENCE FM SURROUND R BACK AM R SURROUND (4 RADIO) R FRONT PRE OUT CENTER En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.177). You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. About Audio Return Channel (ARC) • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. ■ HDMI connection • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). ■ Component/composite video connection When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.34). When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 1 (ZONE OUT) ARC HDMI • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 CENTER L (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 1 AV 3 AV 1 AV 2 HDMI input (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. Y HDMI R ARC SURROUND PHONO L SUR. BACK AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL (2 TV) Y SUBWOOFER A HDMI ZONE OUT • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. R AUDIO AUDIO 1 GND (2 TV) 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL ZONE 3 FRONT FM A R SURROUND BACK R SUR 75Ω L L AUDIO 4 R L REAR R PRESENCE L FRONT R PRESENCE R R R 1 OPTICAL TV OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) • You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT (HDCP2.2) (ZONE OUT) AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) CENTER L AV 1 1 AV 3 AV 2 AV 3 Video input (component video) AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 2 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.66). MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks PR HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT 2 MULTI CH INPUT PB Y Y PR PR PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO R L SUR. BACK AUDIO 1 (2 TV) Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 PB AV 1 PRE OUT ZONE OUT PR PR Y (SINGLE) Y PB PR (FR The unit (rear) PB AUDIO 1 R Y (2 TV) GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND BACK SURROUND HDMI OUT 2 jack HDMI A SURROUND PHONO HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 1 (ZONE OUT) TV ARC (RE SUBW ANTENNA 75Ω L FM AM (4 RADIO) AUDIO HDMI OUT AUDIO 4 L R REAR R PRESENCE SURROUND R BACK FRONT R PRESENCE R SURROUND L R FRONT R (ZONE OUT) MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 CENTER L R 1 OPTICAL (HDCP2.2) 2 L (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 1 AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Y R R SURROUND PHONO L TV SUR. BACK AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL (2 TV) Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 1 A ZONE OUT HDMI R O GND 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks ZONE 2 O AUDIO 4 R L REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE ZONE 3 HDMI input FRONT FM A SURROUND R BACK R SUR 75Ω HDMI Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) Projector ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack Video input (composite video) (HDCP2.2) (ZONE OUT) MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) CENTER L AV 2 1 AV 2 • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.98). (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 1 • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. VIDEO HDMI OUT 2 TV (already connected) AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT V Y V R SURROUND PHONO L AUDIO 1 (2 TV) SUR. BACK AUDIO 2 AUDIO 1 Y SUBWOOFER (2 TV) AUDIO 3 AUDIO A ZONE OUT L R L GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL L ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL ZONE 3 FRONT FM A SURROUND R BACK R SUR 75Ω R R AUDIO 4 R L REAR R PRESENCE R FRONT R PRESENCE TV 1 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 Connecting playback devices Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. • Connecting an iPod (p.80) • Connecting a USB storage device (p.84) • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.140) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ), COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source. • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.111) in the “Option” menu. ■ HDMI connection Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) MI OUT DCP2.2) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 HDMI output N AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE IN PRE OUT ZONE OUT C PR Y (SINGLE) HDMI PB AV 1 PB AV 3 PR 12V HDMI OUT 2 A Y 0.1A (FRONT) HDMI 1 2 SUBW R 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT PRESENCE (REAR) 2 REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA 75Ω FRONT R PRESENCE FM SURROUND R BACK AM R SURROUND (4 RADIO) R FRONT PRE OUT CENTER L FRONT L SURROUND Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ■ Component video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Input jacks on the unit Audio Component video Video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) Composite video Y PB PR PR HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) PB (HDCP2.2) (ZONE OUT) MULTI CH INPUT HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT 2 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 Y AV 6 Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) Audio AV 1 CENTER L (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 1 AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks AV 4 Video output (composite video) (1 BD/DVD) ARC R AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 PB Y Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB TRIGG OU PR Video output (component video) B 1 2 A Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 3 PB AV 1 PRE OUT ZONE OUT PB AV 3 PR 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FM FRONT SURROUND AM SURROUND BACK REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE R SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER PB PR 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL VIDEO GND 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL V 75Ω CENTER FRONT PRESENCE AUDIO 4 COAXIAL (4 RADIO) R SURROUND 1 OPTICAL (2 TV) ZONE C O L AUDIO 3 1 2 ANTENNA 75Ω SUBWOOFER AUDIO 2 R 12V Y 4 COAXIAL L SUR. BACK AUDIO 1 (FRONT) C 3 COAXIAL V SURROUND PHONO C PR Y (SINGLE) Y MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PR (1 BD/DVD) PB CENTER R L REAR R PRESENCE SUR R BAC FRONT R PRESENCE O R FRONT PRE OUT CENTER L L C L FR L OPTICAL C COAXIAL O Video device Video device O R R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks L R L L R R OPTICAL R Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Audio output (PHONO) PHONO jacks Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. PHONO PHONO L L L L R R The unit (rear) R HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 1 (ZONE OUT) GND • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.140) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source. MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 CENTER L (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 AV 1 AV 2 GND (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 R AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Turntable Y Ground lead R SURROUND • Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29). PHONO L SUR. BACK AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL (2 TV) Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 1 A ZONE OUT R GND 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 75Ω • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.111) in the “Option” menu. AUDIO 4 L R REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE ZONE 3 FM SURROUND R BACK C C O O FRONT COAXIAL A Audio device R SU L Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit L Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL) R Digital optical AV 3 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL) Analog stereo (RCA) AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA]) AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA]) Analog stereo (XLR) AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) Turntable (PHONO) PHONO L R OPTICAL R XLR XLR XLR (Female connector) XLR (Male connector) Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR]) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and a stereo pin cable. Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.80) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.84). ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. ZONE 4 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO V Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. ZONE CONTROL VIDEO AUX PHONES ❑ HDMI connection RETURN ZONE 3 DISPLAY L L AUDIO R HDMI IN R The unit (front) DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R HDMI IN HDMI Game console The unit (front) Game console Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. Camcorder • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack. If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.33). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2. En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Assembling the AM antenna Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 CENTER L (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 RE IN R 2 A SURROUND PHONO L AUDIO 1 (2 TV) SUR. BACK AUDIO 2 Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 3 PB AV 1 PRE OUT ZONE OUT C PR Y (SINGLE) PB AV 3 PR 12V 0.1A (FRONT) 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT PRESENCE Connecting the AM antenna REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA 75Ω AUDIO 4 R L REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE FM SURROUND R BACK AM R SURROUND (4 RADIO) R FRONT PRE OUT CENTER Hold down Insert Release L FRONT The unit (rear) • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. Connecting the network cable Preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight. Internet For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.57). Network Attached Storage (NAS) WAN PC LAN Modem Network cable ESS WIREL Router NETWORK AV 6 Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 AC IN TRIGGER OUT 1 REMOTE IN RS-232C OUT 2 The unit (rear) PR 12V • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. 0.1A • If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network Connection” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.135). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 Connecting other devices Connecting a device with analog multichannel output Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function You can connect an analog multichannel output device such as a DVD player and an SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a power amplifier or a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug cable. • The front channel output should be connected to the AUDIO 3 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit. MULTI CH INPUT jacks The unit (rear) Channel output (Center) MULTI CH INPUT HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 L (ZONE OUT) 1 CENTER A TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks The unit (rear) ARC AV 1 CENTER L (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 NETWORK AV 4 (Subwoofer) R R AV 5 Y PR AV 6 COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB AV 7 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) SUR. BACK TRIGGER OUT PR REMOTE SUBWOOFER AUDIO 2 IN AUDIO 3 SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER 2 NGLE) GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL L PB AV 3 PR 12V 0.1A 12V (FRONT) 0.1A 1 (Surround back) 2 R RROUND BACK AUDIO 3 (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT PRESENCE (REAR) SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 2 REAR PRESENCE NA O) AUDIO 4 R C PR Y R RS-232C OUT 2 SURROUND ( 3 NET 1 B 1 SURROUND PHONO L Power amplifier (such as Yamaha MX-A5000) TRIGGER OUT MI (HDCP2.2) MULTI CH INPUT Trigger In (+12V) L REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE R L (Surround) Device with analog multichannel output R FRONT R AUDIO 3 (AUDIO) jacks L PRE OUT CENTER L FRONT L SURROUND L SURROUN BACK System connector jack (Front) Yamaha subwoofer R If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.141) in the “Setup” menu. • You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using “Video Out” (p.111) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection. • Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker configuration. • When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are not available. En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 8 Connecting the power cable After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) NETWORK ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AC IN OTE RS-232C To an AC wall outlet OUT (REAR) SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 2 SURROUND SURROUND L BACK FRONT L PRESENCE REAR L PRESENCE En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit. VOLUME • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. ON SCREEN TOP MENU Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE En 43 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings AUDIO 6 When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) • Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.25) a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”  “Layout”  “Surround” (p.126). • Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.26) SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU 1 2 POP-UP/MENU ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Cursor keys ENTER RETURN a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”  “Layout”  “Front Presence” (p.126). 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and then “Manual Setup”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. PURE DIRECT TV VOL TV CH b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence speaker layout and press ENTER. • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. TV INPUT MUTE b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER. Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. OPTION ON SCREEN En 44 Configure the corresponding speaker settings. c If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout in “Rear Presence”. 7 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) 4 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. MIN VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. OPTION ON SCREEN – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER 5 MAX MIN 9 MAX Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. – Keep the room as quiet as possible. RETURN DISPLAY MODE – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. – Do not connect headphones. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE RETURN TV CH 1 2 3 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. YPAO MIC jack YPAO MIC Turn on the power amplifier. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit. • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN to select “CANCEL” and proceed to Step 4. The unit (front) E 1 9 4 2 3 YPAO 5 microphone Ear height En 45 R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ❑ Multi Position The following screen appears on the TV. SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER Selects multi measure or single measure. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. TOP MENU Settings POP-UP/MENU 6 OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). If desired, select the measuring options. a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.46) or “Angle/Height” (p.47) and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE • If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the key in orange) and then use the cursor keys. TV CH This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.51) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.48) En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Single measure a ❑ Angle/Height Multi measure (5 listening positions) d Enables/disables the angle/height measurement. e bac Settings Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) b c a e d c a b d En 47 Yes Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective sound fields. No (default) Disables the angle/height measurement. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.55) or “Warning messages” (p.56). SCENE 1 2 3 Proceed to Step 2. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the measurement. AV 1 (When angle/height measurement is enabled) 4 • Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. 2 Perform the angle/height measurement. a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement. b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base. Pole • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH (When angle/height measurement is disabled) Proceed to Step 3. Microphone base En 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 c Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”. SOURCE RECEIVER e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the positions “2” and “3”. f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the fourth angle measurement. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] SCENE 1 2 3 4 Microphone base PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle measurement finishes. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH • We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height. Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place. • Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement finishes. d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement. The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle measurement finishes. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.53). En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 SOURCE RECEIVER To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. 6 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Caution AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME The adjusted speaker settings are applied. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.108) in the “Option” menu. En 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) SOURCE RECEIVER When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. (When angle/height measurement is disabled) • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.55) or “Warning messages” (p.56). SCENE 3 3 4 Proceed to Step 5. • Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. (When angle/height measurement is enabled) The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. Proceed to Step 4. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 SOURCE RECEIVER d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement. Perform the angle/height measurement. a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER. Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement. AV 1 2 5 6 1 2 TUNER PHONO The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle measurement finishes. 3 4 7 V-AUX 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET MULTI [A] [B] b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base. AUDIO c Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the positions “2” and “3”. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the fourth angle measurement. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Microphone base DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle measurement finishes. • We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height. Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place. • Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement finishes. En 52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 SOURCE RECEIVER Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 8 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.53). AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 6 SCENE 1 2 3 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 4 Checking the measurement results PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME You can check the YPAO measurement results. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 1 OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. DISPLAY The adjusted speaker settings are applied. MODE • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. The following screen appears. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 7 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. 1 2 3 1 Measurement result items 2 Measurement result details 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.108) in the “Option” menu. En 53 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker Angle (Horizontal) Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position Height Height of the presence speakers above the level of the listening position Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.120). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • If there are speakers that cannot be detected, check the power amplifier settings and connections. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 3 To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. En 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause Remedy E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the rear presence speakers). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the corresponding speakers). (This error message will be also displayed if you perform YPAO when the power amplifier is turned off.) En 55 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.53) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. The pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the unit and power amplifier are not same. Check the pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the power amplifier. If they are not compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29), change the pin assignment setting of the power amplifier or use unbalanced (RCA) connections. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.53) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Select “Level” in “Result” (p.53) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. W-1: Out of Phase En 56 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Selecting the connection method You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.12) to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.64). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.40) or the wireless network connection (p.58). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.58). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.40) or Wireless Direct (p.64). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. En 57 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z Connecting the unit to a wireless network There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Select a connection method according to your environment. 6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? Yes A (p.58) SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE No 4 Does your wireless router (access point) have a WPS button? VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN RETURN B (p.60) No Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Yes C (p.61) DISPLAY • The checkmark indicates the current setting. MODE ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 58 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 SOURCE RECEIVER Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.) 1 AUDIO On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-Fi screen. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME The following connection methods are available. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Wireless (WAC) You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”. (You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.) USB Cable You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”. (You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.) OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN The name of the unit DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”. Tap here to start setup PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE The network currently selected When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point). En 59 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit. 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES PROGRAM MUTE 4 You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. The unit (front) 1 2 SCENE 3 ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and press ENTER. 3 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. PRESET When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. OPTION ON SCREEN Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. TV CH 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 60 About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 2 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. 1 2 AUDIO 1 TUNER ■ C: Using other connection methods SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 4 VOLUME • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 3 4 DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET 5 6 TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. ON SCREEN TOP MENU 8 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. TV CH 7 The following connection methods are available. WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.58). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.62). Manual Setting You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.62). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.63). Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. En 61 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. 1 AUDIO PHONO ❑ Searching for an access point If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE 2 4 VOLUME Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL 3 TV CH Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. MUTE When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode En 62 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 SOURCE RECEIVER If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. AV 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. AUDIO TUNER Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. 4 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. 2 Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 3 OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. MODE 4 CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET PURE DIRECT TV VOL Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. TV INPUT Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. TV CH MUTE If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 63 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. AV 1 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 1 2 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. TV CH Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WPA2-PSK (AES) • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. En 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 9 SOURCE RECEIVER If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. MODE The settings made appear on the TV screen. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE 1 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. TV CH MUTE The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. En 65 PLAYBACK SOURCE RECEIVER Basic playback procedure AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 Input selection keys SCENE 3 PROGRAM VOLUME VOLUME POP-UP/MENU MUTE ON SCREEN MUTE TOP MENU 4 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. Selecting an HDMI output jack OPTION ON SCREEN Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.75) HDMI OUT 10 MUTE 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. HDMI¡OUT¡Sel. ¡¡¡OUT¡1+2 • Playing back iPod music (p.80) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.84) TV 7 INPUT 1 • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.79) TUN./ CH PRESET 4 For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. DISPLAY 4 • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.87) OUT 1+2 • Listening to Internet radio (p.91) OUT 2 • Playing back music via AirPlay (p.94) Off VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.67). • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.108). • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.139), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. En 66 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) SOURCE RECEIVER The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME 1 SCENE (SCENE key) POP-UP/MENU 2 3 4 ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY HDMI Output MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV PURE DIRECT TV VOL AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Audio Select (p.111) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.66) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 Sound Program (p.69) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 11ch Stereo 11ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.129) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.74) Off On On On Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.110) --- On On On Mode PRESET INPUT Input (p.66) Input TV CH MUTE • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.114). On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. En 67 Configuring scene assignments SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 Input selection keys SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 SCENE ¡¡¡¡SCENE1 ¡SET¡Complete VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments 3 VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR If you want to control the corresponding playback device after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.151) to register it. MUTE • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.115) in the “Scene” menu. En 68 In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.116) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select Selecting the sound mode SOURCE RECEIVER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] AUDIO ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies • MOVIE THEATER category (p.70): Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 AM 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SUR.DECODE ENHANCER • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.74). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.74). • ENTERTAINMENT category (p.71): Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback a Press ON SCREEN. • CLASSICAL category (p.71): Press CLASSICAL repeatedly. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • LIVE/CLUB category (p.72): Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly. b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • STEREO category (p.72): Press STEREO repeatedly. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “DSP Program” menu (p.117). This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback. ❑ Selecting a surround decoder SUR. DECODE ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the channel indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.143). • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. About Dolby Atmos® This mode lets you enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.73). • Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or multichannel PCM format in the following situations. – Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used. TUN./ CH ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode – Headphones are used (2-channel playback). • When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.72) does not work. • Press STRAIGHT. • This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.73). En 69 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ MOVIE THEATER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP 3). technology (CINEMA DSP HD It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category ¡¡MUSIC HD 3 ¡¡CLASSICAL Hall¡in¡Vienna VOLUME VIRTUAL FPL L C R FPR SL SW1 SR PL PR Sound program “CINEMA DSP !” lights up • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds). • The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers. • If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. • When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. En 70 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Hall in Munich A This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Munich B This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a shoe-box type concert hall with around 1,300 seats. The hall is constructed from marble, resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual. Hall in Frankfurt This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2,400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. Hall in Stuttgart This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2,000 seats located in downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left of listeners has a powerful presence. Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more exciting. Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely. Hall in USA A This is a large 2,600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced. Hall in USA B This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2,600. The ample resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by longer than average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector suspended above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from the direction of the stage. Church in Tokyo The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for reproducing church organ and choral music. Church in Freiburg Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church. Pavilion Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound. En 71 Church in Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Village Gate This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center. Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Arena This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.25) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 11ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. • CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.70) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.72) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo” is selected. En 72 Enjoying unprocessed playback SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 3 PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 4 1 bPLII Movie bPLIIx Music bPLII Music Press STRAIGHT. bPLII Game Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ENTER RETURN bPLIIx Movie bPLIIx Game POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN bSurround ¡¡¡STRAIGHT DISPLAY CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET STRAIGHT TV Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR MODE Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all sources. A real acoustic space (including overhead) will be created especially when object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is played. • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.72) works when multichannel source is played back. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) MUTE The surround decoder enables multichannel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TUN./ CH SUR.DECODE • Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and the selected decode type (p.118). • For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.170). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. ¡SUR.¡DECODE ¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR En 73 • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. • When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.72) does not work. • If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby Atmos content is played). Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) SOURCE RECEIVER When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 1 Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 ¡PURE¡DIRECT VOLUME MUTE Press PURE DIRECT. In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default). VOLUME L TOP MENU R POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER RETURN – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs DISPLAY Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. – Using the multi-zone function MODE – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) VOLUME ENHANCER CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR PRESET “ENHANCER” lights up TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL PURE DIRECT TV CH MUTE • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.110) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP ENHANCER TUN./ CH SLEEP En 74 Listening to FM/AM radio SOURCE RECEIVER You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] AUDIO TUNER SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. 4 VOLUME Setting the frequency steps POP-UP/MENU (Asia model only) MUTE TOP MENU ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT TUN./ CH PRESET 4 10 MUTE 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press FM or AM to select a band. Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. 3 MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT VOLUME Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). FM 98.50MHz TUN./CH Numeric keys TV 7 INPUT FM AM 1 2 1 FM 87.50MHz At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ON SCREEN SUR. MODE DECODE • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. Selecting a frequency for reception STEREO TUNED VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. TUNER FRQ STEP FM50/AM9 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. En 75 • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.111) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. Registering favorite radio stations (presets) SOURCE RECEIVER You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX ■ Selecting a preset station Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 TUNER • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.78). SCENE 3 PROGRAM Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. POP-UP/MENU ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET PRESET PURE DIRECT TV VOL Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. MUTE Preset STEREO TUNED SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT MEMORY AM 4 5 01:FM 98.50MHz Preset OK VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered TUN./ CH 6 Numeric keys 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL Preset STEREO TUNED ZONE SETUP VOLUME 2 Preset number TV CH 01:FM 98.50MHz 1 TV INPUT Preset Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.75) to tune into the desired radio station. OPTION ON SCREEN You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 4 02:Empty FM 98.50MHz VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR En 76 STEREO TUNED L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.78). Radio Data System tuning SOURCE RECEIVER • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 TUNER PHONO BLUETOOTH USB NET MULTI [A] [B] AUDIO SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.78). 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. STEREO TUNED TV 10 MUTE 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. INFO TUN./ CH PRESET 7 INPUT When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 4 1 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information 4 ■ Receiving traffic information automatically Info Program Type • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR • To cancel the search, press RETURN. Item name • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. Finished STEREO TUNED STEREO TUNED FM 98.50MHz CLASSICS TrafficProgram TP FM101.30MHz VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR VOLUME Traffic information station (frequency) L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR Information • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name En 77 You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. AV 1 2 5 6 1 2 TUNER PHONO ■ Browse screen Operating the radio on the TV SOURCE RECEIVER 3 4 7 V-AUX 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET MULTI [A] [B] 1 AUDIO TUNER 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 The playback screen is displayed on the TV. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 ■ Playback screen VOLUME 2 1 TOP MENU 1 Preset station list Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. POP-UP/MENU 2 Preset number OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. MODE Menu CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE 1 Radio station information Submenu TV CH (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.77), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. Utility 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. En 78 Playing back music via Bluetooth SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE The unit TOP MENU 4 Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) VOLUME • To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN DISPLAY External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH • If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. • To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. • For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174). ENTER RETURN On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. BLUETOOTH SCENE 1 3 Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. • The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. 2 On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. En 79 – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – In the “Setup” menu, select “Bluetooth”  “Audio Receive”  “Disconnect”. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work depending on the Bluetooth device). Playing back iPod music Connecting an iPod You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174). 1 2 • The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay (p.94) Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) RETURN DISPLAY PHONES 5V USB Connected 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. En 80 ■ Browse screen Playback of iPod content SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] USB 1 5 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total MODE • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.82). En 81 Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play) 1 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 Playback information OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT MODE Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 SCENE 1 TV CH Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. En 82 Operate your iPod itself to start playback. ■ Shuffle/repeat settings SOURCE RECEIVER You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL Shuffle (Shuffle) TV CH MUTE Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 83 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. USB • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. VOLUME • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174). TOP MENU • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. POP-UP/MENU You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. OPTION ON SCREEN Connecting a USB storage device ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. MODE The unit (front) RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT DISPLAY PHONES PRESET 5V TV 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device USB Connected VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. En 84 2 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV 1 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Contents list Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102). PRESET TV TV VOL 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu PURE DIRECT INPUT 4 Item number/total Function TV CH MUTE 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down En 85 Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu TV MUTE • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. POP-UP/MENU Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. 4 En 86 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.40). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174). 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. En 87 Playback of PC music contents SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 3 V-AUX 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AUDIO NET 1 SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. 4 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102). • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. TV CH 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. En 88 ■ Browse screen SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 1 2 3 AV 1 ■ Playback screen 2 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.90) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU 3 5 AUDIO 1 TUNER Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.90) and playback status (such as play/pause). POP-UP/MENU ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 2 Playback information 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET 3 Operation menu 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Menu Function TV CH 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS). Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.113). Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 89 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings SOURCE RECEIVER You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 90 Listening to Internet radio SOURCE RECEIVER You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] NET 2 3 • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.40). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu. Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 1 • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. 4 • This service may be discontinued without notice. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102). En 91 ■ Browse screen SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 1 2 3 AV 1 ■ Playback screen 2 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME 1 Playback indicator 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. POP-UP/MENU 3 Contents list OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT TV VOL TV CH 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu External device operation keys MODE INPUT 3 5 AUDIO 1 TUNER Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.93). MUTE 1 Page Up Menu Function Bookmark On Adds the station selected in the list to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.93). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 92 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) SOURCE RECEIVER By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 3 AUDIO ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 1 Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. DISPLAY Enter the vTuner ID in this area. MODE • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu. En 93 • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To unregister a station, select “My Favorites” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Playing back music via AirPlay Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC (wired or wireless) 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) ) appears. iPod iOS6 (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu. • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174). • You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.105). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. En 94 ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu. AV • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. AUDIO 3 • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.113) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. SCENE 1 2 3 4 Caution PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. External device operation keys MODE 1 Playback indicator PRESET TV Menu Function Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 95 Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4). ■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4). ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms. Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI) • Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.176). • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Audio (ZONE OUT) Multi-zone configuration examples Guest room (Zone2 or Zone3) ■ Enjoying music in other rooms Living room (main zone) You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms. Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.97 TV (for digital video playback): p.98 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.97 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Audio (ZONE OUT) Study room (Zone2 and/or Zone3) Video/audio (HDMI) Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.97 Kitchen (Zone2 or Zone4) Living room (main zone) Connection TV: p.98 En 96 Preparing the multi zone system ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit. Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an external amplifier. • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. ■ Connecting an external amplifier and speakers to play back audio The unit (rear) Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. HDMI (HDCP2.2) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV 1 CENTER (1 BD/DVD) (HDCP2.2) AV 2 1 AUDIO 2 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 3 3 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB PR Y PB AV 1 PRE OUT C PR Y 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 PRE OUT FRONT (SINGLE) PB AV 3 Video input (component video or composite video) ZONE OUT jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) B PR (FRONT) COMPONENT VIDEO 1 PR PB AV 1 ZONE OUT 4 COAXIAL Y PR A AV 4 PB Y PR Y (SINGLE) (FR MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks L SURROUND SURROUND BACK (R ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT PB PR 2 Y SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER PR ANTENNA 75Ω FM AM (4 RADIO) L ONT ESENCE 2 OPTICAL AV 6 (1 BD/DVD) ARC A SUR. BACK PB Y ZONE OUT H INPUT AV 5 HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (ZONE OUT) AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) ARC The unit (rear) 2 AV 3 SURROUND R BACK R SURROUND R FRONT PR PR PB PB Y Y Y PR PRE OUT CENTER V R PB VIDEO SUBW ANTENNA 75Ω O4 L REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE FM SURROUND R BACK AM (4 RADIO) R SURROUND R FRON V External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) L R AUDIO Zone2 or Zone3 Main zone Zone2 or Zone3 To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”. Main zone En 97 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”. Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room (Zone4). • When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.35). – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. – Changing the sound mode or audio settings • On-screen operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack The unit (rear) (HDCP2.2) (ZONE OUT) MULTI CH INPUT CENTER L 1 HDMI (ZONE OUT) ARC AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL (1 BD/DVD) HDMI input 2 HDMI OUT 2 (Example: using a TV) HDMI HDMI AV 4 R SURROUND PHONO L SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL (2 TV) R GND AUDIO 4 R L REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE Zone2 or Zone4 (Example: using an AV amplifier) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Main zone Zone4 En 98 ■ Operating the unit from another room (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE • To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each device before using (p.149). HDMI (HDCP2.2) AV 3 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y AV 5 Y PR AV 6 COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB REMOTE IN RS- OUT 2 A PB AV 1 PB AV 3 (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER PR 12V REMOTE IN C PR Y PRE OUT 0.1A OUT 1 Remote control 2 R ZONE 3 FRONT (REAR) CENTER FRONT PRESENCE (REAR) SUBWOOFER L (F 2 REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA FM ROUND K AM R SURROUND (4 RADIO) R FRONT OUT Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) TRIGGER OUT PR 1 Y OUT AV 7 B OUT IN Infrared signal receiver NETWORK AV 4 REMOTE IN REMOTE IN/OUT jacks The unit (rear) AV 2 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks PRE OUT CENTER L FRONT L SURROUND Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 L SU BA Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 Main zone En 99 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z 1 AV 1 2 5 6 Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 3 4 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 Input selection keys Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated switches. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected) • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.75) • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.79) RECEIVER SCENE 3 4 4 • Playing back iPod music (p.80) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.84) PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 2 POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN Press RECEIVER z. • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.87) Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or disabled. • Listening to Internet radio (p.91) When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone indicator lights up in the front display. DISPLAY • Playing back music via AirPlay (p.94) • You can also use the web control (p.103) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT 3 TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE • AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. TUN./ CH PRESET 4 • When Zone3 output is enabled, the rear presence left/right channel output is not available in the main zone. 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Use the input selection keys to select an input source. ZONE • Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.176). • You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. En 100 • The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.103) or AV CONTROLLER (p.12). • To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone 3 input or use the party mode (p.101). Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 4 POP-UP/MENU SUR. MODE DECODE MUTE PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT 4 PARTY 10 MUTE 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.) Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be operated. TV 7 INPUT Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). TUN./ CH PRESET 1 When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Setting the sleep timer DISPLAY ENHANCER Press SCENE. VOLUME ENTER RETURN The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) SCENE OPTION ON SCREEN The following functions are also available when the zone you want to operate is enabled. Press VOLUME or MUTE. SCENE 3 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) AUDIO PHONO ■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 SLEEP b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be operated. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. En 101 • You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu. • Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone. Registering favorite items (shortcut) SOURCE RECEIVER You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. AV 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 3 4 Recalling a registered item Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 BLUETOOTH USB NET SCENE 3 PROGRAM • Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual contents cannot be registered. POP-UP/MENU Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. OPTION ON SCREEN 1 2 ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. Press MEMORY. LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT TV VOL Recall Preset 01:USB VOLUME FPL L C R FPR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR RPL SBL SB SBR RPR • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. VOLUME FPL L C R FPR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR RPL SBL SB SBR RPR – The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the unit. – The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. Shortcut number (flashes) TV INPUT Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40). • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. Memory Preset 01:Empty PRESET PRESET Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET. • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. MODE CLASSICAL 1 2 You can also use PRESET to select a shortcut. Registering an item VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 4 • You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.93). TV CH – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. MUTE • To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 Memory Preset 02:Empty MEMORY VOLUME FPL L C R FPR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR RPL SBL SB SBR RPR “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered TUN./ CH Numeric keys 3 To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP En 102 – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. – A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.105) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control (wired or wireless) PC • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.136), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. (wired or wireless) Router The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.12). • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.135) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 7.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) En 103 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 4 5 7 2 6 1 PLAY INFO 1 CONTROL Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. 2 TOP MENU 2 STATUS Moves to the top menu screen. Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. 3 SCENE 3 SETTINGS Selects a scene for the selected zone. Moves to the settings screen. 4 POWER 4 PARTY MODE Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. Turns on/off the party mode (p.101). 5 VOLUME 5 SYSTEM POWER Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. Turns on/off the power for all zones. 6 MAIN VOLUME 6 RELOAD Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. • Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings. En 104 ■ Settings screen 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 1 Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 2 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. 3 • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). 1 Rename • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.136) or the name of each zone (p.137). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.134) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.135). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. AirPlay Password Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.94). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.136) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.135). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. Licenses Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit. En 105 Viewing the current status SOURCE RECEIVER Switching information on the front display AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM TOP MENU Info Audio Decoder About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION ENTER RETURN SUR. MODE DECODE DISPLAY ENHANCER PARTY MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH NET RADIO 10 MUTE Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) INFO * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Viewing the status information on the TV VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR Information 1 Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status TV 7 INPUT * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUN./ CH PRESET 4 ¡ AV1 ¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE DISPLAY HDMI OUT INFO VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Bluetooth USB SERVER AirPlay 4 VOLUME MUTE Input source group 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–4 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER Input source/ Party mode status Audio format/ Decoder * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.77). 106 Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 En Volume/ YPAO Volume status To close the information display, press DISPLAY. Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) Option menu items You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. Option Tone Control • Default settings are underlined. VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 108 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 108 Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 108 YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Dialogue (Dialog) TV screen 2 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 109 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 109 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. (SW.Trim) Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Enhancer (Enhancer) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 107 109 109 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 110 Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio). 110 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. Video Processing (V.M) (Video Process.) Video Adjustment Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. (Video Adjust) Input Settings (Input Settings) Page 110 110 Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 111 Audio Select (A.Sel) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 111 Video Out (V.Out) Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 111 Item Function FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 111 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 77 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.83), USB storage device (p.86), or media server (p.90). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.83), USB storage device (p.86), or media server (p.90). — ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Page Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Settings Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.45). Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. • You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Settings Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level En 108 Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low On Off Input level ■ Dialogue (Dialog) ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Setting range 0 to 3 Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. Settings • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.70) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Ideal position En 109 Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode. Configures the video signal processing settings. Enhancer (Enhancer) Video Mode (V.M) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.74). Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. Settings • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • Compressed Music Enhancer works on the main zone, Zone2 and Zone3. Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.74). Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Video Adjustment (Video Adjust) Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.132) in the “Setup” menu. Default TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings 1 to 6 • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer. Settings On (On) Enables the high-resolution mode. (The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal processing condition.) Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode. En 110 ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) Configures the input settings. Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Audio Select (A.Sel) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings Auto (Auto) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]) HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Analog (Analog) Always selects analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO (RCA or XLR). Video Out (V.Out) Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Settings Off (Off) Does not output video. AV 1–7 (AV1–7), V-AUX (V-AUX) Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. En 111 Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. CONFIGURATIONS 4 Configuring input sources (Input menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 113 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 113 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 113 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 113 Balance Input Attenuator Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to avoid sound distortion. 114 Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode Enables/disables the jitter elimination function. 114 • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 112 Page ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Decoder Mode Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). Settings Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Input sources AirPlay Settings 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 Disable To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 113 ■ Balance Input Attenuator Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.67) using the TV screen. Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.37). Input source AUDIO 4 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. Settings Bypass Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input. ATT.(-6dB) Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB). ■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode Enables/disables the jitter elimination function. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), AirPlay, SERVER, NET RADIO, (network services), Bluetooth, USB Settings Off Disables the jitter elimination function. Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 Enables the jitter elimination function. The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case, select lower level. En 114 5 6 ■ Load Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Device Control Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 115 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 116 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 116 Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Page Settings 115 Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177). • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.68). En Off 115 ■ Rename/Icon Select Detail Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. ■ Setup procedure To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 2 3 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). Check or uncheck Choices Input Input (p.66), Audio Select (p.111) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.66) Mode DSP Program (p.69), Pure Direct Mode (p.129), Enhancer (p.74), Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.110) Sound Tone Control (p.108), YPAO Volume (p.108), Adaptive DRC (p.108), Extra Bass (p.109) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.130), Dialogue Lift (p.109), Dialogue Level (p.109), Subwoofer Trim (p.109) Video Video Mode (p.131), Video Adjustment (p.110) Volume Master Volume (p.66) Lipsync Lipsync (p.128), Delay (p.129) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.124), PEQ Select (p.127) Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.67) for the selected scene. En 116 4 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 117 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. DSP Program menu items Item Function Settings Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. • Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Function Settings Decode Type Selects a surround decoder to be used in combination with the selected sound program. bSurround*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*), Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. En 118 ■ Settings for decoders The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”. Sound program 2ch Stereo Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto, Off Level Front / Rear Balance Left / Right Balance The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type bSurround Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Monaural Mix Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Adjust the height volume balance using the presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Enables/disables monaural sound output. Function Settings Center Spread Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played. Off, On Select “On” to spread center channel signals to left and right if you feel the center sound is too strong when 2-channel source is played. Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. 11ch Stereo Height Balance Item bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) Off, On Neo:6 Music • Available items in “11ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. En 119 4 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. En 120 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Setup menu items Menu Item Function Auto Setup Setting Pattern Speaker Manual Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 45 Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 124 Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 124 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 124 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 124 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 125 Setting Data Copy Configuration Page Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 125 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 125 Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size. 125 Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 125 Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers. 126 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 127 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 127 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 127 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 128 En 121 Menu Item Lipsync Sound Video HDMI Network Bluetooth Function Page Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 128 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 128 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 129 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 129 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 129 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 129 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 129 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 129 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3. 130 Virtual Presence Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 130 Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 130 DAC Digital Filter Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter). 130 Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. 130 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 131 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 133 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 133 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 134 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 134 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 135 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 135 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 136 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 136 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 137 Audio Receive Disconnect Bluetooth Standby Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 79 Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 137 En 122 Menu Item Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 137 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 138 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 138 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 138 Audio Delay Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3. 138 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 138 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 138 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 139 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 139 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 139 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 139 Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 140 Zone2 Set Zone3 Set Multi Zone Zone4 Set Display Set Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 140 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 140 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 141 Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode Trigger Output2 Target Zone Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 141 Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 141 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 142 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 142 Select an on-screen menu language. 143 Function Language Page Zone Rename Main Zone Set ECO Function En 123 ■ Setting Data Copy Speaker (Manual Setup) Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. Configures the speaker settings manually. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). Front ■ Setting Pattern Selects the size of the front speakers. Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. Settings When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). • Measurement results (Auto Setup) • Configuration • Distance • Level • Parametric EQ • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”. Settings Pattern1, Pattern2 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen. Settings • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. En 124 Surround Front Presence Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. Settings Settings Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Large Select this option for large speakers. Large Small Select this option for small speakers. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size. None Rear Presence Settings Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Large Select this option for large speakers. Small Select this option for small speakers. None Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected. Settings Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. • This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Small x2 None Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 Settings Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Use Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. None • This setting is not available when “Surround" is set to "None", or when “Layout (Surround)" is set to "Front". Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”. • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. En 125 Rear Presence Layout Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect. Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers. Settings Surround Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. Rear Height Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall. Overhead Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling. Dolby Enabled SP Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence speakers. Settings Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.72) works in this case. • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to “None”. • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”. • To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26). Front Presence Subwoofer Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect. Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. Settings Settings Front Height Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side wall. Left + Right Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the room. Overhead Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling. Front + Rear Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the room. Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence speakers. Monaural x2 Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely. Dolby Enabled SP • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”. • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”. • To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26). En 126 ■ Distance ■ Parametric EQ Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Settings Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 Manual Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments ■ Level Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.45). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) 1 2 3 Adjusting while viewing the front display Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. a Press LEVEL. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker. • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.45) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB En 127 5 Sound To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Configures the audio output settings. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer) Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone ■ Lipsync Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. Settings Delay Enable Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. En 128 ■ Max Volume Adjustment Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB ■ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.) Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) ■ Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.74). • When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. Settings ■ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Auto Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. Settings En 129 Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode ■ DAC Digital Filter Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite sounds. 3 Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD (p.70). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3 HD functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo). Settings Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP HD3. On Enables CINEMA DSP HD3. Sharp Roll-off Type Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics. It has a tendency to produce clear sounds. Slow Roll-off Type Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics. It has a tendency to produce soft sounds. Short Latency Type Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter. It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds. ■ Virtual Presence Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.70). ■ Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. Settings Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS). On Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS). Settings • Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual Presence Speaker” to “Off”. ■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected. Settings Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). • VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back. En 130 Disable Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio. Enable Enables playback of object-based audio signals. Video Resolution Configures the video output settings. Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). Processing Enables the video signal processing. Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) Aspect Settings Disables the video signal processing. Does not convert the resolution. • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.147) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) ■ Video Mode Direct Through Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. En 131 Detail Enhancement Adjustment Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details. Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6). Setting range 0 to 50 ■ Setup procedure 1 2 Edge Enhancement Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER. Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Setting range 0 to 50 Brightness Adjusts the video brightness. Setting range -100 to 0 to +100 Contrast Adjusts the video contrast. 3 4 Setting range -100 to 0 to +100 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. Saturation To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Adjusts the video saturation. Setting range -100 to 0 to +100 En 132 HDMI ARC Configures the HDMI settings. Enables/disables ARC (p.178) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.177). Settings Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. ■ Audio Output • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Selects a device to output audio. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) is set to “Main”. Amp Settings AUDIO 1–3 Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Default AUDIO 1 Settings • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. En 133 Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Network Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Configures the network settings. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. ■ Standby Through ■ Network Connection Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Selects the network connection method. Settings Settings Off (This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the power saving mode. En 134 Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.40). Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.58). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.64). ■ IP Address ■ Network Standby Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). DHCP Settings Select whether to use a DHCP server. Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Enables the network standby function. (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 135 ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Network Name Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Filter ■ Procedure Enables/disables the MAC address filter. 1 2 Settings Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • AirPlay (p.94) and DMC (p.113) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 136 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Bluetooth Multi Zone Configures the Bluetooth settings. Configures the multi zone settings. ■ Bluetooth ■ Main Zone Set Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.79). Configures the main zone setting. Settings Zone Rename Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Procedure ■ Bluetooth Standby 1 2 Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.135) is set to “Off”. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. En 137 3 Initial Volume Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Settings • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.) Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings. Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone. Audio Delay Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the video. Settings Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Setting range 0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments) Mono Max Volume Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Settings Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3. • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.137). En 138 ■ Zone4 Set ■ Party Mode Set Configures the Zone4 settings. Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.101) for each zone. Choice Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. Settings You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.137). ■ Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Main, Zone2, Zone3 • To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Settings Main, Zone2, Zone4 • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.176). Audio Output Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set to “Zone2”. On Enables the audio output. Off Disables the audio output (video output only). En 139 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Function 2 Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. ■ Input Assignment • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. ■ Display Set ■ Procedure Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2” 1 Dimmer (Front Display) Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Settings En 140 On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Manual Wallpaper Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings Choices Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. Target Zone ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Settings Trigger Mode Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. Zone3 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone3. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone3. Zone4 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone4. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone4. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of any zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in any zone. Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source”. Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB, MULTI CH Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. En 141 ■ Memory Guard ECO Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Configures the auto-standby setting. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. En 142 Language Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) Select an on-screen menu language. You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 143 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on the unit. ■ Audio Signal (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Displays information about the current audio signal. IP Address IP address Subnet mask Format Audio format of the input signal Subnet Mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE) DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC address Input Dialogue Output MAC Address (Wi-Fi) The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal The channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output • Some information may not be available depending on the signal type. vTuner ID vTuner ID Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.136) Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. (When using Wireless Direct) ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. SSID The SSID of the wireless network Security Security method HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output Security Key Security key HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) IP Address IP address Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) Subnet Mask Subnet mask MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address Network Connection ■ HDMI Monitor Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV En 144 “Wireless Direct” indication ■ System Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Displays the system information on the unit. Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.146) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.147) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. Tuner Freq. Step (Asia model only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.147) System ID System ID number Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit 1 2 Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.159). ■ Multi Zone PROGRAM Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4. Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3 3 4 5 Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. En 145 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) REMOTE CON AMP ID1 • Default settings are underlined. Item Function Page REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 146 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 146 TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia model only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 147 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 147 ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 147 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 147 Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be automatically canceled. RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 148 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 148 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 148 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 148 Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1, ID2 1 2 3 4 5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting. If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from Step 3. Settings 6 Turns off the remote control sensor. Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2). Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display window. Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. OFF Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER. 5020 REMOTE SENSOR ON Turns on the remote control sensor. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) ON Press SETUP. To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. • The registered remote control codes (p.149) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. En 146 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) (Asia model only) MONITOR CHECK YES TUNER FRQ STEP FM50/AM9 The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.131) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. Settings FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. TV FORMAT NTSC Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL 4K MODE MODE 2 Default U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models: NTSC Other models: PAL Select the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50Hz) compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. Settings MODE 1 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format. (4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack) Depending on the connected devices or HDMI cables, videos may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format. • When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps. En 147 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP FIRM UPDATE USB Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. ■ Firmware update procedure Choices Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.159). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) INITIALIZE CANCEL Checking the firmware version (VERSION) Restores the default settings for the unit. VERSION x.xx Choices VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.145) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. En 148 Controlling external devices with the remote control SOURCE RECEIVER You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to sequentially operate multiple functions at once. AV 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 1 Press SETUP. Item Function LEARN Assigns a function to each key by learning the code from other remote controls. 152 PRESET Registers the remote control code for external devices. 150 RENAME Edits the device names or scene names displayed on the remote control’s display window. 154 MACRO Programs macro operations (sequence of control commands). 155 CLEAR Clears the remote control configurations. 157 ERASE Erases a function assigned to each key by learning. 158 EX-IR Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the authorized custom installers only. SCENE 3 4 SETUP PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT 10 MUTE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. — 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. PRESET TUN./ CH TV 7 INPUT 2 Item name PRESET 4 • If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control automatically exits from the setup menu. OPTION ON SCREEN Page SETUP En 149 Registering remote control codes SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Registering the remote control code for a TV AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] • You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys (p.151). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models). SCENE 2 3 PROGRAM 1 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 4 POP-UP/MENU Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code. Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code and press ENTER. Once the remote control code is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have registered its remote control code. AUDIO 1 5 If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 3. 6 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. ❑ TV operations Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source selected on the unit. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. TV CH Switch the channels of the TV. TV z Turns on/off the TV. DISPLAY 2 MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV operation keys Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV operation keys MUTE TV z 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP 4 Press TV z and press ENTER. “----” (empty) or code currently registered TUN./ CH Numeric keys ---- SETUP En 150 ■ Registering the remote control codes for playback devices SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] AUDIO Input selection keys 4 You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the input selection keys. For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the AV1 jack. Code currently registered 5098 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM TOP MENU 4 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH Numeric keys TV 10 MUTE 0 Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your playback device. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. TUN./ CH PRESET 7 INPUT 1 DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP 5 • If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A] or [B] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source after pressing the key. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 4 • Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.) VOLUME MUTE Press a corresponding input selection key and press ENTER. 2 3 Once the remote control code is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 3. 6 To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4 and 5. 7 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. SETUP Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the 4-digit remote control and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET En 151 • For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.68). SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER ❑ Playback device operations Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 • By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 VOLUME MUTE SOURCE z TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU External device operation keys OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY MODE External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV VOL Returns to the previous screen. Switches information on the display. Switches between modes. PURE DIRECT INPUT Confirms a selected item. RETURN MODE TV TOP MENU Displays the top menu. POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. a Starts playback of the selected song/video. h Searches forward/backward (by holding down). TV CH TV operation keys MUTE TV z External device operation keys j f g SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 Skips forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.150). TUN./ CH 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP 1 Numeric keys • These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control. SETUP En 152 Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. Select an item. ENTER DISPLAY PRESET The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work after you register the remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function to each key. Turns on/off the playback device. Cursor keys Menu operation keys Programming from other remote controls (learning) 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER. LEARN 3 Press one of the following keys depending on the type of your device. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). For TV: press TV z. 4 5 SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 8 Press ENTER. Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls at each other. Remote control of external device AUDIO 4 AV SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 1 4 V-AUX 6 Perform the following steps (a and b) within 10 seconds. a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to assign a function. For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys, DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys TV CH For TV: TV operation keys TV operation keys b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is learned until “OK” appears in the display window. If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4. 7 SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are learned. AM TUN./ CH 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 Numeric keys SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER. d Press RECEIVER z. PURE DIRECT TV VOL 7 Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY TV MUTE AUDIO b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER. 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart PRESET INPUT 6 STRAIGHT 5 ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N STEREO NET LIVE CLUB MOVIE 3 CLASSICAL • If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following steps. a Press SETUP. MODE External device operation keys MODE USB DISPLAY 2 RETURN BLUETOOTH ENTER • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the new functions. Note External device operation keys OPTION ON SCREEN 1 POP-UP/MENU TUNER VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME PROGRAM 4 4 3 SCENE 2 MUTE 1 [B] [B] 3 [A] SCENE [A] MULTI 2 PHONO MULTI 4 NET 1 3 USB PHONO 2 BLUETOOTH PROGRAM 1 TUNER To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. SETUP En 153 e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z Editing device names AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] AUDIO Input selection keys 1 2 3 PROGRAM To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w). Press SETUP. BD/DVD Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. SCENE 2 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to rename. To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r). Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. SCENE 1 5 You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the remote control’s display window. 6 Press ENTER to register the new name. Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. POP-UP/MENU RENAME OPTION ON SCREEN RETURN 3 DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Press one of the following keys to select a device or a scene. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). PRESET For TV: press TV z. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL 7 To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat Steps 3 to 6. 8 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z. TV CH TV z MUTE For scene: press one of the SCENE keys. • To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press ZONE to select a zone. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP 4 Press ENTER. TUN./ CH SLEEP SETUP ZONE En 154 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z Operating multiple functions at once (macro) 4 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. “MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled) The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple functions at once. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] AUDIO Input selection keys SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM TOP MENU 4 1 POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT 2 TUN./ CH PRESET 10 MUTE • To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3. By default, the following macro operations are available after pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are enabled. Press SETUP. Macro operations Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Macro operation key Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and press ENTER. MACRO TV 7 INPUT RECEIVER 1st command 2nd commend RECEIVER z Turns on the unit. (unregistered) Input selection keys Turns on the unit. Selects the corresponding input source. (unregistered for the [A] and [B] keys) DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE 4 ■ Enabling the macro operations VOLUME MUTE For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key operation. SETUP 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press ENTER. ON En 155 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z SOURCE/RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] AUDIO 2 3 You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out sequentially according to the programmed remote control commands. 5 (Example) Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to “AV1” and dturning on the TV • Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control codes (p.150) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.152). 4 a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z. • We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume adjustment) in macro operations. PROGRAM TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select “AV1” and press SOURCE z. Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. OPTION ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and press ENTER. MACRO PRESET TV TV CH TV z MUTE 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and press ENTER. EDIT SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT 4 AM TUN./ CH 4 5 7 8 6 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SLEEP d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select “TV” and press TV z. 6 Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or input selection key) to which macro operations are assigned and press ENTER. “MACRO 1” appears in the display window. SETUP MACRO1 En 156 To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and the setting is confirmed automatically. 7 PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL b (MACRO 2) Press AV1. VOLUME MUTE Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to include in the macro operations in sequence. To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control, press SOURCE/RECEIVER. Input selection keys SCENE 1 ■ Programming macro operations To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 V-AUX 3 4 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 Input selection keys PROGRAM To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys, proceed to Step 5. 1 To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4. 2 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared. You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. SCENE VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 4 ALL You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of settings or clear all the remote control configurations. SCENE 3 “ALL” appears in the display window. ■ Clearing the remote control configurations AV 1 Resetting the remote control configurations Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER. 4 When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the input selection key or TV z. CLEAR DISPLAY Press a key to which the selected process is applied. When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE. MODE 3 CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET 5 TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 PRESET LEARN Clears the functions learned from other remote controls. PRESET Restores the default remote control code settings. RENAME Restores the default device name settings. MACRO Clears the macro operation settings. RESET Clears all remote control configurations and restores default settings. HDMI OUT AM TUN./ CH 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation key (input selection key or RECEIVER z). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to be cleared and press ENTER. SLEEP SETUP En 157 Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat from Step 2. 6 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. ■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by learning SOURCE RECEIVER You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and restore the default key assignments. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 AUDIO Input selection keys 1 Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. SCENE 3 PROGRAM TOP MENU 4 2 VOLUME MUTE Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ERASE Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Press one of the following keys to select the device for which key assignments will be cleared. For playback device: press the input selection key. For TV: press TV z. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE 4 5 Press ENTER. Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on the window display. If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat from Step 2. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT AM 6 Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key assignments are erased. 7 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. TUN./ CH 4 5 7 8 6 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SETUP En 158 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network SOURCE RECEIVER New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PHONO MULTI [A] [B] 1 2 3 • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.148). VOLUME POP-UP/MENU If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE 3 • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.145). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.148). Information icon MODE A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. En 159 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.45). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.124). I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.140) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.129). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.138). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.142). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.129). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.138). When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.146). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.111). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, En 160 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit and power amplifier, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, power amplifier, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, power amplifier, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.142). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. En 161 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.146). The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.149). Even if the remote control code is registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control. The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external device are weak. Replace with new batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.152). The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with the remote control. Learning is impossible in this case. Memory capacity is full. Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions (p.158). External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. The remote control does not learn new functions. En 162 Audio Problem No sound. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.129). The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.128). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.124). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.127). The speaker cable connecting the power amplifier and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the power amplifier may be malfunctioning. The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.128). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.125). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.133). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). En 163 Problem Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.33). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.133). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.133). Also, enable ARC on the TV. No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the unit with HDMI). The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled. Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.139). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. The input signal level is too high when AUDIO 4 (XLR) is selected as the input source. Adjust the output signal level on the playback device or use “Balance Input Attenuator” in the “Input” menu (p.114). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.98). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. En 164 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.147). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.179). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2. The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack. To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.35). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.33). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.66). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.98). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. The video is interrupted. En 165 FM/AM radio Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.111). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.75). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Select the station manually (p.75). The AM radio signal is weak. Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.76). Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.137). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.79). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.79). Bluetooth Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. En 166 Problem Cause Remedy The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.79). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.135). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.135). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. USB and network Problem The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). Wireless network is not found. En 167 Problem Cause Remedy The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.87). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.136). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.87). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.136). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.148). The unit does not detect the PC. The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. En 168 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.87). The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.80). Access error Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.40). Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.146). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.146). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.87). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. No device Unable to play En 169 Glossary Audio information Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). Dolby Atmos Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener. Dolby Surround Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology. Dolby Atmos Stream Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. DTS 96/24 Dolby Digital Plus DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Digital Surround Dolby Enabled Speaker DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback. En DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. 170 DTS Express Sampling frequency/Quantization bit DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio WAV DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) DTS Neo:6 One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DTS:X ■ Others DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels, DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at www.dts.com/dtsx LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync FLAC Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. Neural:X Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can produce up to 11.x channels. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). En 171 HDMI and video information Network information Component video signal SSID With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. Deep Color WPS Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. Composite video signal HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI). HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. En 172 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. CINEMA DSP HD3 The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3 feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP. En 173 ■ File formats Supported devices and file formats ❑ USB/PC (NAS) ■ Supported devices Sampling frequency (kHz) Quantization bitrate (bit) Bitrate The number of channels Gapless playback WAV * 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ • A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible, depending on the model. MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — ❑ USB devices MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — • The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔ AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 — File ❑ Bluetooth device • The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. * Linear PCM format only ❑ iPod • To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. Made for. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) (as of July 2015) • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of July 2015) En 174 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Video device The unit HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y 480p/576p VIDEO 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i m m m m m 1080p VIDEO in VIDEO 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO in m 480i/576i m m m m m m m: Available En 175 Multi-zone output ■ Audio output Out In ■ Video output ZONE OUT jacks Zone2 Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) Digital audio (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) m (*6) Zone3 m (*6) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2) m (*4) m (*5) Out In m (*6) Analog audio (AUDIO) m m m USB (including iPod) (*7) m m m Network sources (*7) m m m TUNER m m m MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*8) COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Zone2/3 Zone2/3 HDMI video Component video Composite video On-screen display (browse/playback) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*9) Zone2 Zone4 m m m m m m: Available *8 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3” *9 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4” m: Available *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On) *2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4” *3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input *7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.103) or use the party mode (p.101) En 176 (Example) Information on HDMI HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.33) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.35). For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Volume control including mute 1 2 • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. (Example) OPTION ON SCREEN HDMI Control HDMI Control ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) DISPLAY c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.67) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.151) En 177 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. 1 2 e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. – “ARC” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.33). Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.68), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. 5 6 7 Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. En 178 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. En 179 Reference diagram (rear panel) HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN MULTI CH INPUT AV 1 CENTER L (1 BD/DVD) AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE IN R RS-232C OUT 2 A SURROUND PHONO L AUDIO 1 (2 TV) SUR. BACK AUDIO 2 Y SUBWOOFER AUDIO 3 PB AV 1 PRE OUT ZONE OUT C PR Y (SINGLE) PB AV 3 PR 12V 0.1A (FRONT) 1 2 R R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 ZONE 3 FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER FRONT PRESENCE (REAR) SUBWOOFER L (FRONT) 1 2 REAR PRESENCE ANTENNA 75Ω AUDIO 4 R L REAR R PRESENCE FRONT R PRESENCE FM R SURROUND BACK AM R SURROUND (4 RADIO) R FRONT PRE OUT CENTER L FRONT L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK FRONT L PRESENCE REAR L PRESENCE (U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. En 180 Trademarks Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. This receiver supports network connections. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Windows™ App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Explanations regarding GPL Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Google Noto Fonts Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association. En 181 This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX) Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch) (FRONT L/R*, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER) * barter to AUDIO 3 • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2) Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3) • Video Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) Component x 3 (AV 1–3) • HDMI Input HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX) • Others USB x 1 (USB2.0) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) Output jacks • Analog Audio • Audio Format • Video MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT - Dolby Atmos - Composite x 1 - Dolby TrueHD - Component x 1 - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2) * barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4) - DTS-HD Master Audio - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - DTS Express Other jacks - DTS • YPAO MIC x 1 - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • REMOTE IN x 1 • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • REMOTE OUT x 1 (HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible) • TRIGGER OUT x 2 • Link Function: CEC supported • RS-232C x 1 TUNER HDMI • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA • Analog Tuner [U.K. and Europe models] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) [Other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz USB - 480p/60 Hz • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R, - 576p/50 Hz • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A R.PRESENCE L/R) - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, - Pre Out (Balance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R, - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz R.PRESENCE L/R) (1:GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD) - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - Subwoofer Out (Unbalance) x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2) - Subwoofer Out (Balance) x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2) - ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3) - Headphone x 1 En 182 Bluetooth • Sink Function Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) • Post Decoding Format • Maximum Output Level (0.06%THD) - Dolby Pro Logic (RCA Unbalance Preout) - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game • Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device • Bluetooth Version................................................. Ver. 2.1+EDR • Supported Profile................................................ A2DP, AVRCP • Supported Codec..................................................... SBC, AAC Center ...............................................................4.0 V or more - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game Front Presence L/R............................................4.0 V or more Rear Presence L/R ............................................4.0 V or more Subwoofer 1–2 ..................................................6.5 V or more • Maximum Communication Distance....................... 10 m (33 ft) • Rated Output Level/Impedance Zone2/Zone3.....................................................4.0 V or more (RCA Unbalance Preout) Network Front L/R .............................................................. 1.0 V/470  • PC Client Function Center.................................................................. 1.0 V/470  • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 Surround L/R ....................................................... 1.0 V/470  Surround Back L/R .............................................. 1.0 V/470  Front Presence L/R.............................................. 1.0 V/470  • Internet Radio Rear Presence L/R .............................................. 1.0 V/470  • WiFi function Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................1.0 V/470  - Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and USB connection Surround Back L/R ............................................4.0 V or more - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method Surround L/R .....................................................4.0 V or more - Dolby Surround • Wireless Output ............................................ Bluetooth Class 2 • AirPlay supported Front L/R............................................................4.0 V or more Zone2/Zone3 ....................................................... 1.0 V/470  (XLR Balance Preout) Front L/R .............................................................. 2.0 V/470  - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device Center.................................................................. 2.0 V/470  - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Surround L/R ....................................................... 2.0 V/470  (XLR Balance Preout) Front L/R............................................................8.0 V or more Center ...............................................................8.0 V or more Surround L/R .....................................................8.0 V or more Surround Back L/R ............................................8.0 V or more Front Presence L/R............................................8.0 V or more Rear Presence L/R ............................................8.0 V or more Subwoofer 1–2 ................................................13.0 V or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO ............................................................... 3.5 mV/47 k RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) .......................... 200 mV/47 k XLR Balance (Audio 4) Attenuator Off................................................... 200 mV/100 k Surround Back L/R .............................................. 2.0 V/470  Attenuator On................................................... 400 mV/100 k - Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz Front Presence L/R.............................................. 2.0 V/470  • Headphone Impedance....................................... 16  or more - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n Rear Presence L/R .............................................. 2.0 V/470  • Maximum Input Signal Mixed Mode Compatible Decoding Formats Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................2.0 V/470  PHONO ..............................................................60 mV or more RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) ............................2.4 V or more • Decoding Format XLR Balance (Audio 4) - Dolby Atmos Attenuator Off.......................................................2.4 V or more - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus Attenuator On.......................................................4.8 V or more - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX • Frequency Response (Pure Direct) - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB DTS Express • RIAA Equalization Deviation - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB - DTS Digital Surround En 183 • Total Harmonic Distortion General • Filter Characteristics (Pure Direct, 1 V) (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) PHONO to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (1 kHz)....0.008% or less H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. ...........................................................................0.008% or less L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) (Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted) PHONO to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance) ............................................................................95 dB or more Video Section • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Taiwan model]................................ AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz • Video Signal Type........................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM [Other models] ................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption.......................................................... 65 W • Video Signal Level AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance) Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75  • Power Consumption (No Signals) ..................................... 35 W ..........................................................................112 dB or more Component • Standby Power Consumption • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Preout (RCA Unbalance) .....................................2.5 µV or less Preout (XLR Balance) ..........................................5.0 µV or less • Channel Separation Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75  Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75  • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more PHONO (Input 1 k Shorted, 1kHz/10 kHz) • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)..... 60 dB or more ................................................................. 86 dB/68 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) ................................................................. 86 dB/68 dB or more ........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB Main Zone Preout ............................................................ 14 dB Zone2/Zone3 Preout ........................................................ 14 dB • Volume Control Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz ......................................................................................... 0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby Off (HDMI No Signals)............................................................1.5 W HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, Bluetooth Standby Off AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) • Maximum Gain (Volume: Maximum) HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off FM Section Wired ............................................................................ 2.2 W Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................ 2.2 W Wireless Direct ............................................................. 2.4 W HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Asia model] .................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz ......................................................................................... 2.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ......................................................................................... 3.1 W • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ......................435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) ....................................65 dB/64 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) * Including legs and protrusions • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright) Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6% ......................435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”) Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz • Antenna Input................................................ 75  unbalanced • Weight ........................................................... 13.5 kg (29.8 lbs) Zone2/Zone3 Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz AM section • Tuning Range Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz [Asia model] ............................ 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz En 184 * Specifications are subject to change without notice. Index Dialogue 109, 144 Dimmer (Front Display) 140 DLNA 87 DMC 113 Dolby Atmos 22, 44, 69, 130 DSP Program (front display information) Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 142 145, 159 Numerics 11.2-channel system 22 11ch Stereo 72 2.1-channel system 26 2ch Stereo 72 4K Ultra HD 179 7.1-channel system 23 9.2-channel system 22 106 E ECO 142 Error indication (front display) 169 External device control (remote control) Extra Bass 109 A Adaptive DRC 108 ADVANCED SETUP 145 AirPlay 94 AM radio 75 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 33, 178 Audio Decoder (front display information) Auto Power Standby 142 Auto Preset (FM radio) 78 148 CINEMA DSP 9, 70 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 130 Compressed Music Enhancer 74 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) Option menu Lipsync 128 M 106 MAC Address Filter 136 En 185 107 P Parametric EQ 127 Party mode 101 Power amplifier 30 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) Pure Direct 74 HDCP 38, 163, 165 HDMI OUT2 Assign 139 HDMI output selection 66 HDMI signal compatibility 179 Headphone 72 Hi-Res Mode 110 L D Decoder Off (front display information) O Initial Volume 129, 138 Input jack assignment 140 Input Trim (In.Trim) 111 Internet radio 91 iPod content playback 80 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 45 NAS content playback 87 Network Connection 134 Network information 144 Network Name 136 Network Standby 135 Firmware update 148, 159 FM radio 75 Frequency step setting 75, 147 Front display information 106 76 R Radio Data System tuning 77 Remote control 18 Remote control ID 146 Rename 113, 116, 137 Repeat 83, 86, 90 Restoring the default settings 148 I C 149 N F H 106 B Backing up/recovering the settings Balanced connection 30, 31 Basic speaker configuration 22 Bluetooth 79 Bluetooth Standby 137 Bookmark 93 Max Volume 129, 138 Memory Guard 142 Menu language selection 43 Multiple room playback 96 Muting 66, 101 S 94 SCENE function 67 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format Setup menu 120 Short Message 140 Shortcut (Registering favorite items) Shuffle 83, 86, 90 Signal information 144 147 102 Sleep timer 101 sleep timer 19 Sound program 70, 71 Standby Through 134 Straight decode 73 Subwoofer Trim 109 Surround decoder 73 T Test Tone 128 Tone Control 108 Trigger function 41, 141 Turntable 37 U Unbalanced connection 31, 32 USB storage device content playback 84 V Virtual CINEMA FRONT 25, 72 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 23, 130 Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 22, 130 W Wallpaper 141 Web control 103 Wireless (Wi-Fi) 58, 134 Wireless Direct 64, 134 WPS 60, 172 X XLR jacks 29 Y YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO Volume 108 45 Z Zone 96, 137 En 186 © 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH133A0/EN
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128
  • Page 129 129
  • Page 130 130
  • Page 131 131
  • Page 132 132
  • Page 133 133
  • Page 134 134
  • Page 135 135
  • Page 136 136
  • Page 137 137
  • Page 138 138
  • Page 139 139
  • Page 140 140
  • Page 141 141
  • Page 142 142
  • Page 143 143
  • Page 144 144
  • Page 145 145
  • Page 146 146
  • Page 147 147
  • Page 148 148
  • Page 149 149
  • Page 150 150
  • Page 151 151
  • Page 152 152
  • Page 153 153
  • Page 154 154
  • Page 155 155
  • Page 156 156
  • Page 157 157
  • Page 158 158
  • Page 159 159
  • Page 160 160
  • Page 161 161
  • Page 162 162
  • Page 163 163
  • Page 164 164
  • Page 165 165
  • Page 166 166
  • Page 167 167
  • Page 168 168
  • Page 169 169
  • Page 170 170
  • Page 171 171
  • Page 172 172
  • Page 173 173
  • Page 174 174
  • Page 175 175
  • Page 176 176
  • Page 177 177
  • Page 178 178
  • Page 179 179
  • Page 180 180
  • Page 181 181
  • Page 182 182
  • Page 183 183
  • Page 184 184
  • Page 185 185
  • Page 186 186
  • Page 187 187

Yamaha CX-A5100 de handleiding

CX-A5100
Yamaha
Merk
Yamaha
Model
CX-A5100
Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding
PDF downloaden
rapport

in andere talen

Gerelateerde papieren

Andere documenten